ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System User

ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System User
User Manual
ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System
Catalog Numbers 1756-RM, 1756-RMXT, 1756-RM2, 1756-RM2XT
Important User Information
Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1 available from
your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/) describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference,
and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment
must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Allen-Bradley, ControlFLASH, ControlLogix, FactoryTalk, PanelView, PhaseManager, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, RSLinx, RSLogix, RSNetWorx, VersaView, RSView32, Logix5000, ControlLogix-XT,
Integrated Architecture, Stratix 8000, PowerFlex, POINT I/O are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Summary of Changes
This publication contains new and updated information. Changes throughout
this revision are marked by change bars, as shown to the right of this paragraph.
New and Updated
Information
This table contains the changes made to this publication revision.
Table 1 - New and Updated Information
Topic
Page
This publication includes the addition of the 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT modules.
1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT modules can only be used with other 1756-RM2/A or
1756-RM2XT modules. You cannot mix 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT modules with
1756-RM/A, 1756-RM/B or 1756-RMXT modules.
References throughout the manual to specific redundancy module catalog numbers
have been replaced with ‘redundancy module.’
This manual includes SIL2 application information.
13
Features of enhanced redundancy system using 1756-RM2/A module.
16
Replace 1756-RM/B redundancy modules with 1756-RM2/A redundancy modules
without initiating a switchover.
Fiber channels will experience a delay during a switchover, but will remain synched.
20
1756-RM2/A restrictions.
22
Added 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT information; important revision information
changes for the 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT modules.
24
The revision has been updated wherever the 1756-L7x controller appears in this manual
to 19.053.
27
Added new firmware bundles 20.054_kit1, 19.053_kit1, and 19.081_kit1.
49
Use newest version of RMCT when using 1756-RM2/A redundancy module.
54
Added the 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT modules and installation requirements.
57
Added the statement: 1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT modules can only be used with
other 1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT modules. You cannot mix 1756-RM2/A and 1756RM2XT modules with 1756-RM/A, 1756-RM/B or 1756-RMXT modules.
57
Environment and Enclosure change.
58
Small form-factor pluggable warning.
59
Added new 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT module graphics.
61
Added installation instructions.
62
Added information about connecting fiber-optic cable to redundancy channels and
using redundant fiber cabling.
64
Updated fiber-optic cable information for new redundancy modules.
67
Updated the graphics for the redundant fiber-optic cable.
68
Updated the graphics for the redundant fiber-optic cable.
69
Using dual fiber ports with the 1756-RM2 redundancy modules
138
Crossload times when using a 1756-L7x and a 1756-RM2/A redundancy module.
151
Using a 1756-L7x controller with a 1756-RM2/A redundancy module.
152
Status indicators for 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT.
200
1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT status indicators.
227
CH1 status indicator.
229
CH2 status indicator.
229
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
3
Summary of Changes
Table 1 - New and Updated Information
Topic
4
Page
SFP error message.
230
Added missing Module Status Display descriptions for the 1756-RM/A and 1756-RM/B
modules.
231
Replace 1756-RM/B redundancy modules with 1756-RM2/A redundancy modules
without initiating a switchover.
264
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Table of Contents
Preface
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 1
About Enhanced Redundancy
Systems
Features of the ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Redundancy System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Modules in Enhanced Redundancy Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Redundancy System Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Qualification and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switchovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
17
18
19
19
20
22
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy
System
Components of an Enhanced Redundancy System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controllers in Redundant Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Modules in Redundant Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Modules in Redundant Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supplies and Redundant Power Supplies in Enhanced
Redundancy Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EtherNet/IP Networks with Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EtherNet/IP Network Features in an Enhanced
Redundancy System, Revision 19.052 or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Address Swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unicast Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible Communication Delays on EtherNet/IP Networks . . . . .
ControlNet Networks with Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlNet Network Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant ControlNet Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Communication Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1715 Redundant I/O Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HMI Connected via an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HMI Connected via a ControlNet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
28
29
31
32
34
35
35
36
36
36
38
38
41
42
44
44
46
46
47
49
49
49
50
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy
System
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Redundancy System Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install an Enhanced Redundancy System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Install the Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
51
51
53
53
5
Table of Contents
Install the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add the EDS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Install the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the First Chassis and its Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Chassis and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install a Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Redundancy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment and Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
European Hazardous Location Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety-related Programmable Electronic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Small Form-factor Pluggable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
North American Hazardous Location Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser Radiation Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Second Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Connect the Redundancy Modules via a Fiber-optic Cable . . . .
Connect the Fiber-optic Communication Cable to Redundant
Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect the Fiber-optic Communication Cable to
Single Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber-optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4: Update Redundant Chassis Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade the Firmware in the First Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade the Firmware in the Second Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 5: Designate the Primary and Secondary Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After Designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion from a Nonredundant to a Redundant System . . . . . . .
Qualification Status via the RMCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset the Redundancy Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove or Replace the Redundancy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
54
54
54
55
56
56
57
58
58
58
58
59
59
59
60
60
63
63
65
66
67
67
68
71
71
73
73
74
75
75
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
6
Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use IP Address Swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static versus Dynamic IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset the IP Address for an EtherNet/IP Communication
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use CIP Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Produce/Consume Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure EtherNet/IP Communication Modules in a
Redundant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
77
77
77
80
80
81
84
85
85
Table of Contents
Options for Setting the IP Addresses of EtherNet/IP
Communication Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Half/Full Duplex Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Use An Enhanced Redundancy System in a Device-level
Ring Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter 5
Configure the ControlNet Network
Produce/Consume Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Network Update Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NUTs with Multiple ControlNet Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Use a Scheduled or Unscheduled Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Use a Scheduled Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Use an Unscheduled Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Add Remote ControlNet Modules While Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Schedule a New Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Update an Existing Scheduled Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Check the Network Keeper States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Save the Project for Each Primary Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Automatic Keeper Crossloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
About the Redundancy Module Configuration Tool (RMCT) . . . . .
Determine if Further Configuration is Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the RMCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identify the RMCT Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update the RMCT Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Info Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable User Program Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Module Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands in the Synchronization Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recent Synchronization Attempts Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Log Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Classifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Extended Information About an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpret an Event’s Extended Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Event Log Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear a Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Update Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Update Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Update Lock Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locked Switchover Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
105
106
107
109
110
111
113
114
115
115
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
123
124
124
129
130
131
134
135
7
Table of Contents
System Event History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a User Comment for a System Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save System Event History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Dual Fiber Ports with the 1756-RM2/A Redundancy Module
Fiber Channel Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
137
137
138
138
138
139
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
8
Configure the Redundant Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crossloads, Synchronization, and Switchovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Crossload and Synchronization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Crossload and Synchronization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous Task After Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Periodic Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crossloads and Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Estimate the Crossload Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Object Attributes for Crossload Times . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equation for Estimating Crossload Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program to Minimize Scan Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use a 1756-L7x Controller with a 1756-RM2/A
Redundancy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Multiple Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimize the Number of Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Tags for Efficient Crossloads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Concise Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program to Maintain Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Array (File)/Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan-dependent Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program to Optimize Task Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify a Larger System Overhead Time Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the System Overhead Time Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Periodic Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program to Obtain System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Logic to Run After a Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Messages for Redundancy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify User Program Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use an Unconnected Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure the MSG Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Task Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Value for the Watchdog Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store a Redundancy Project to Nonvolatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store a Project While the Controller is in Program or
Remote Program Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store a Project While a System is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
141
144
144
145
145
145
147
149
149
150
151
152
152
152
153
154
157
159
159
160
163
164
166
167
168
170
171
171
171
172
175
177
177
178
179
181
Table of Contents
Load a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Support for Partial Import Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plan for Test Edits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finalize Edits with Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserve Memory for Tags and Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
182
182
183
186
187
Chapter 8
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced
Redundancy System
Tasks to Monitor the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Logging in Enhanced Redundancy Systems . . . . . . . . .
Use Programming to Monitor System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify System Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Qualification Status via Module Status Displays . . . . . . . . .
Check Qualification Status via the RMCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conduct a Test Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization After a Switchover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the ControlNet Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor the ControlNet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
189
190
190
190
191
192
192
194
195
196
197
198
198
198
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
General Troubleshooting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use RSLogix 5000 Software to View Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant Controller Major Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the RMCT for Synchronization Attempts and Status . . . . . . . . . .
Recent Synchronization Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module-level Synchronization Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the RMCT Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpret Event Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export All Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keeper Status Causing Synchronize Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Module Status Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Keeper Status in RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software . .
Valid Keeper Status and Signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partner Network Connection Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Module Connection Lost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Module Missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification Aborted Due to a Nonredundant Controller . . . . . . . . .
Controller Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
199
200
201
203
204
204
205
206
206
211
214
216
216
217
217
218
220
222
223
225
226
9
Table of Contents
Appendix A
Status Indicators
Redundancy Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . .
1756-RM/A and 1756-RM/B Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Module Fault Codes and Display Messages . . . . . . . .
Recovery Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
227
230
233
235
Appendix B
Event Log Descriptions
Event Log Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard
Redundancy System or to Another
Enhanced Redundancy System
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade the Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps After System Components Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade Ethernet Modules When Rotary Switches Are Set
between 2…254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade by Using Redundancy System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace 1756-RM/A or 1756-RM/B Redundancy Modules with
1756-RM2/A Redundancy Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
239
240
241
241
242
243
244
250
264
Appendix D
Convert from a Nonredundant
System
Update the Configuration in RSLogix 5000 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace Local I/O Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace Aliases to Local I/O Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove Other Modules from the Controller Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add an Identical Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade to Enhanced Redundancy Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update the Controller Revision and Download the Project . . . . . . . . .
266
268
269
270
271
271
271
Appendix E
Redundancy Object Attributes
Redundancy Object Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Appendix F
Enhanced Redundancy System
Checklists
10
Chassis Configuration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Module Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlLogix Controller Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlNet Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EtherNet/IP Module Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project and Programming Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
277
278
278
279
279
280
281
Table of Contents
Appendix G
Enhanced Redundancy Revision
History
Changes to This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Index
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
11
Table of Contents
Notes:
12
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Preface
This publication provides this information specific to enhanced redundancy
systems:
• Design and planning considerations
• Installation procedures
• Configuration procedures
• Maintenance and troubleshooting methods
This publication is designed for use by anyone responsible for planning and
implementing a ControlLogix® enhanced redundancy system:
• Application engineers
• Control engineers
• Instrumentation technicians
The contents of this publication are for those who already have an understanding
of Logix5000™ control systems, programming techniques, and communication
networks.
IMPORTANT
Additional Resources
The 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT modules are interference-free with regard
to safety functions and can be used in ControlLogix SIL2 applications.
These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation.
Table 2 - Additional Documentation
Resource
Description
1756 ControlLogix Controllers Specifications Technical Data, publication 1756-TD001
Contains specifications on ControlLogix controllers and redundancy modules.
1715 Redundant I/O Specifications, publication 1715-TD001
Contains specifications on a Redundant I/O system.
1715 Redundant I/O System User Manual, publication 1715-UM001
Contains information on how to install, configure, program, operate and troubleshoot a
Redundant I/O system.
ControlLogix Controllers User Manual, publication 1756-UM001
Contains information on how to install, configure, program, and operate a ControlLogix
system.
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003
Contains information on RSLogix™ 5000 programming instructions.
Logix5000 Controllers Quick Start, publication 1756-QS001.
Provides detailed information about how to use ControlLogix controllers.
ControlFLASH™ Firmware Upgrade Kit Quick Start, publication 1756-QS105
Contains information on how to upgrade module firmware.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication
1770-4.1
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
13
Preface
The following publications provide specific information about communication
module connections.
Table 3 - Additional Documentation
Resources
Description
1756 Communication Modules Specifications Technical Data, publication 1756-TD003
Describes Ethernet communication module specifications.
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual, publication CNET-UM001
Describes ControlNet modules and how to use ControlNet modules with a Logix5000
controller.
EtherNet/IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems, publication
ENET-UM001
Describes how to use EtherNet/IP communication modules with your Logix5000
controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network.
Ethernet Design Considerations for Control System Networks, publication ENET-SO001
Provides fundamental best-practice guidelines for designing the Ethernet
infrastructure for your Supervisory Controls and Data Acquisition (SCADA) and MES
(Manufacturing Execution Systems) systems with Rockwell Automation software and
hardware products.
EtherNet/IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, publication ENET-AP005
Describes how to configure and implement a device-level ring topology.
EtherNet/IP Socket Interface Application Technique, publication ENET-AT002
Describes the socket interface used to program
MSG instructions to communicate between a Logix5000 controller via an
EtherNet/IP module and Ethernet devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP
application protocol, such as bar code scanners, RFID readers, or other standard
Ethernet devices.
You can view or download publications at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/. To order paper copies of technical
documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley® distributor or Rockwell
Automation sales representative.
14
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
1
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Topic
Page
Features of the ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System
16
Enhanced Redundancy System Components
17
Enhanced Redundancy System Operations
19
Restrictions
22
The ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System is a system that provides
greater availability because it uses a redundant chassis pair to maintain process
operation when events, such as a fault on a controller, occur that stop process
operation on nonredundant systems.
The redundant chassis pair includes two synchronized ControlLogix chassis with
identically specific components in each. For example, one redundancy module
and at least one ControlNet or EtherNet/IP communication module are
required.
Controllers are typically used in enhanced redundancy systems, but are not
required if your application only requires communication redundancy. Your
application operates from a primary chassis, but can switch over to the secondary
chassis and components if necessary.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
15
Chapter 1
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Features of the ControlLogix
Enhanced Redundancy
System
The software and hardware components required to configure and use a
ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system provide these features:
• Redundancy module speeds of up to 1000 Mbps when using a 1756RM2/A module with another 1756-RM2/A module. Redundancy
module speeds up to 100 Mbps when using a 1756-RM/A with another
1756-RM/A module, and a 1756-RM/B module with another 1756-RM/
B module.
• Redundant fiber ports for crossloading; no single point of failure of a fiber
cable.
• Plug-and-play-style commissioning and configuration that does not
require extensive programming.
• ControlNet and EtherNet/IP network options for the redundant
chassis pair.
• Easy-to-use, fiber-optic communication cable that connects redundant
chassis pairs. Use the same cable for the 1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM/B
modules.
• Simple redundant controller configuration by using a checkbox in the
Controller Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software.
• A redundancy system ready to accept commands and monitor the
redundant system states after basic installation, connection, and powerup.
• Switchovers occur as fast as 20 ms.
• Support for these FactoryTalk® applications for EtherNet communication
modules:
– FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
– FactoryTalk Batch
– FactoryTalk PhaseManager™
• Support for CIP Sync technology over an EtherNet/IP network to
establish time coordination across the enhanced redundant system.
• Access to remote I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.
• Access to 1715 Redundant I/O systems over an EtherNet/IP network.
• 1756-EN2T socket support.
16
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Chapter 1
Features Not Supported
•
•
•
•
•
Any motion feature
Any SIL3 functional safety feature within the redundancy controllers
Firmware Supervisor
Event Tasks
Firmware revision 19.052 for 1756-L7x controller
IMPORTANT For Ethernet modules, signed and unsigned firmware are available. Signed modules provide the
assurance that only validated firmware can be upgraded into a module.
Signed and unsigned firmware:
• Both signed and unsigned firmware are available.
• Product is shipped with unsigned firmware. To obtain signed firmware, you must upgrade your
product’s firmware.
• To obtain signed and unsigned firmware, go to Get Support Now.
• Once signed firmware is installed, subsequent firmware upgrades must be signed also.
There are no functional/feature differences between signed and unsigned communication modules.
Enhanced Redundancy
System Components
Communication between a redundant chassis pair that includes matching
components makes redundancy possible.
Each chassis in the redundant chassis pair contains these
ControlLogix components:
• One ControlLogix power supply - Required
• One ControlLogix redundancy module - Required
Redundancy modules link the redundant chassis pair to monitor events in
each of chassis and initiate system responses as required.
• At least one ControlLogix ControlNet or EtherNet/IP communication
module - Required
• Up to two controllers - Optional
In addition, redundant chassis are connected to other components outside the
redundant chassis pair, for example, remote I/O chassis or human-machineinterfaces (HMIs).
For more information about components you can use in an enhanced
redundancy system, see Chapter 2, Design an Enhanced Redundancy System on
page 23.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
17
Chapter 1
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
I/O Modules in Enhanced Redundancy Systems
In an enhanced redundancy system, you can use only I/O modules in a
remote chassis. You cannot use I/O modules in the redundant chassis pair.
This table describes differences in network use for I/O in enhanced redundancy
systems.
Remote I/O Module Placement
Available with Enhanced System, Revision 19.052, 19.053,
or 20.054
Available with Enhanced System, Revision 16.081 or
Earlier
EtherNet/IP I/O network

1715 Redundant I/O System

ControlNet network


DeviceNet network(1)


Data Highway Plus(1)


Universal Remote I/O(1)


(1) In an enhanced redundancy system, you can access remote I/O modules on this network only via a ControlNet or EtherNet/IP network bridge.
For more information on using remote and 1715 redundant I/O over an
EtherNet network, see I/O Placement on page 44 and the Redundant I/O
System User Manual, publication 1715-UM001.
18
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Enhanced Redundancy
System Operations
Chapter 1
Once the redundancy modules in the redundant chassis pair are connected and
powered, they determine which chassis is the primary chassis and which is the
secondary chassis.
The redundancy modules in both the primary and secondary chassis monitor
events that occur in each of the redundant chassis. If certain faults occur in the
primary chassis, the redundancy modules execute a switchover to the unfaulted,
secondary chassis.
System Qualification and Synchronization
When the enhanced redundant system is first started, the redundancy modules
run checks on the redundant chassis to determine if the chassis contain the
appropriate modules and firmware to establish a redundant system. This stage of
checks is referred to as qualification.
After the redundancy modules complete qualification, synchronization can take
place. Synchronization is a state in which the redundancy modules execute these
tasks:
• Verify that the connection between redundancy modules is ready to
facilitate a switchover
• Verify that the redundant chassis continue to meet qualification
requirements
• Synchronize the data between the redundant controllers, also called
crossloading
This data is crossloaded:
– Updated tag values
– Force values
– Online edits
– Other project information
Synchronization always takes place immediately following qualification. Also,
depending on your system configuration, synchronization can take place at the
end of each program run within the controller project, or at other intervals that
you specify.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
19
Chapter 1
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Switchovers
During redundant system operation, if certain conditions occur on the primary
chassis, primary control is switched to the secondary chassis. These conditions
cause a switchover:
• Loss of power
• Major fault on the controller
• Removal or insertion of any module
• Failure of any module
• Damage to a ControlNet cable or tap - This event only causes a switchover
if it results in the ControlNet communication module transition to a
lonely state, that is, the module does not see any devices on the network.
• Loss of an EtherNet/IP connection - This event only causes a switchover if
it results in the EtherNet/IP communication module transition to a lonely
state, that is, the module does not see any devices on the network.
• A program-prompted command to switchover
• A command issued via the Redundancy Module Configuration Tool
(RMCT)
After a switchover occurs, the new primary controller continues to execute
programs beginning with the highest-priority task that had been executing on the
previous primary controller.
For more information about how tasks execute after a switchover, see Crossloads,
Synchronization, and Switchovers on page 144.
Your application can require some programming considerations and potential
changes to accommodate a switchover. For more information on these
considerations, see Chapter 7, Program the Redundant Controller on page 141.
20
IMPORTANT
For instructions about how to replace 1756-RM/B redundancy modules with
1756-RM2/A redundancy modules without initiating a switchover, see Replace
1756-RM/A or 1756-RM/B Redundancy Modules with 1756-RM2/A
Redundancy Modules on page 264.
IMPORTANT
During a switchover of the fiber channels of the 1756-RM2/A module, scan
time will encounter a delay of ~10 ms; however, the chassis will remain
synched at all times.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Chapter 1
HMI Blind Time Reduction on Ethernet During a Switchover
HMI Blind Time is the time during a switchover from primary to secondary,
when tag data from the controller is unavailable for reading or writing. HMI
Blind Time is associated with visualizing process operations from an HMI;
however, it is applicable to any software that uses tag data, such as data loggers,
alarming systems, or historians. Reducing HMI Blind Time is important to avoid
shutdowns.
Brief communication interruption occurs if the connection between RSLinx®
Enterprise software and the redundant chassis pair uses a path exclusively over an
EtherNet/IP network and a switchover occurs. After the switchover is complete,
communication resumes automatically.
The time between the communication (updating active data) interruption and
the restoration (resumes updates) is often referred to as ‘HMI Blind Time.’
Beginning with version 20.054, HMI Blind Time due to switchover has been
reduced.
IMPORTANT
RSLinx Enterprise software version 5.50.04 (CPR9 SR5) is required beginning with
version 20.054.
HMI Blind Time is dependent on several system variables that determine this
length of time as follows:
• Quantity and types of tags on scan in RSLinx Enterprise software
• Client screen update rates
• Number of program and controller scope tags in the redundant controller
• Controller loading, which includes the following:
• Number of tasks and scan rates (assumes no continuous task)
• Memory usage
• Null task percentage available
• Network traffic
Based on testing with Windows Server 2003 software, ‘HMI Blind Time’ was
reduced between 40…80%. User results will vary based on the variables listed
above.
IMPORTANT
RSLinx Enterprise software is part of FactoryTalk Services, which has been
releasing a series of Service Releases (SRs) that are backward compatible with
any CPR 9 products. The HMI Blind Time feature can be used by existing and
new users who are using FactoryTalk View version 5.0 (CPR9) or newer.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
21
Chapter 1
About Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Restrictions
There are restrictions that you must consider when using an enhanced
redundancy system. Most of these restrictions apply to all enhanced redundancy
system revisions. Exceptions are noted:
• The 1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT modules can be used only with other
1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT modules. You cannot mix 1756-RM2/A
and 1756-RM2XT modules with 1756-RM/A, 1756-RM/B, or 1756RMXT modules.
• Please note that firmware revision 19.052 applies to 1756-L6x controllers
only and revision 19.053 applies to 1756-L7x controllers only.
• You cannot use standard ControlNet and EtherNet/IP communication
modules in enhanced redundancy systems. You must use enhanced
communication modules in enhanced redundancy systems. Enhanced
communication modules contain a ‘2’ in their catalog number. For
example, the 1756-EN2T module.
• The redundant controller program cannot contain these tasks:
– Event tasks
– Inhibited tasks
For recommendations and requirements related to programming the
redundant controller, see Program the Redundant Controller on
page 141.
• You cannot use the Firmware Supervisor feature available in RSLogix 5000
software in an enhanced redundancy system.
• You cannot use SERCOS Motion or Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP
in a redundant controller program.
• You cannot use consumed Unicast connections in an enhanced
redundancy system. If you attempt to use consumed Unicast connections,
disqualification occurs and qualification of an unsynchronized redundant
chassis pair is not allowed. You can use produced Unicast connections
consumed by remote consumers.
• You cannot use a 1756-EWEB module, and any functionality specific to
that module, in an enhanced redundancy system.
• You can use a maximum of 2 controllers and 7 ControlNet or EtherNet/IP
communication modules in each chassis of a redundant chassis pair.
• In enhanced redundancy systems, revision 16.081 and earlier only,
EtherNet/IP communication modules cannot execute these tasks:
– Connect to remote I/O over an EtherNet/IP network
– Connect to 1715 Redundant I/O systems
– Use Produce/Consume tags
– Connect to Device-level Ring networks
– Use CIP Sync technology
You can execute the tasks mentioned above in an enhanced redundancy
system, revision 19.052 or later.
22
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Topic
Page
Components of an Enhanced Redundancy System
24
Redundant Chassis
28
Controllers in Redundant Chassis
29
Redundancy Modules in Redundant Chassis
31
Communication Modules in Redundant Chassis
32
Power Supplies and Redundant Power Supplies in Enhanced Redundancy Systems
34
ControlNet Networks with Redundant Systems
38
Other Communication Networks
42
Other Communication Networks
42
I/O Placement
44
1715 Redundant I/O Systems
44
Using HMI
46
Firmware Requirements
49
Software Requirements
49
This chapter explains how to use the required and optional components to design
an enhanced redundancy system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
23
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Components of an Enhanced
Redundancy System
The central components of a ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system are
those in the redundant chassis pair. You can connect other system components to
the redundant chassis pair. However, the redundant chassis pair, and the
components within it, provide redundant communication and control features.
This table lists the components available with enhanced redundancy systems.
Please note that some component availability is revision-specific.
Table 4 - Components Available for Use in a Redundant Chassis Pair
Product Type
Cat. No.
Description
Redundancy
module
1756-RM2/A
ControlLogix redundancy module
This component is available with enhanced redundancy
systems, revision 16.057, 16.081, 19.052 or later when
using 1756-L6x controllers, and 19.053 or later when
using 1756-L7x controllers.
1756-RM2XT
ControlLogix-XT™ redundancy module
This component is available with enhanced redundancy
systems, revision 16.057, 16.081, 19.052 or later when
using 1756-L6x controllers, and 19.053 or later when
using 1756-L7x controllers.
1756-RM
ControlLogix redundancy module
1756-RMXT
ControlLogix-XT redundancy module
1756-A4
ControlLogix 4-slot chassis
1756-A4LXT
ControlLogix-XT™ 4-slot chassis, -25…60 °C (-13…140 °F)
This component is available with enhanced redundancy
systems, revision 19.052 or later.
1756-A5XT
ControlLogix-XT 5-slot chassis
1756-A7
ControlLogix 7-slot chassis
1756-A7XT
ControlLogix-XT 7-slot chassis, -25…70 °C (-13…158 °F)
1756-A7LXT
ControlLogix-XT 7-slot chassis, -25…60 °C (-13…140 °F)
1756-A10
ControlLogix 10-slot chassis
1756-A13
ControlLogix 13-slot chassis
1756-A17
ControlLogix 17-slot chassis
1756-CN2/B
ControlLogix ControlNet bridge module
1756-CN2R/B
ControlLogix redundant media ControlNet bridge module
1756-CN2RXT
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet bridge module
1756-EN2T
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP bridge module
1756-EN2F
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP fiber bridge module. This component
is available with enhanced redundancy systems, revision
20.054 or later.
1756-EN2TR
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP 2-port module
This component is available with enhanced redundancy
systems, revision 19.052 or later.
1756-EN2TXT
ControlLogix-XT EtherNet/IP bridge module
Chassis
Communication
modules
24
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Page
31
28
32
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
Table 4 - Components Available for Use in a Redundant Chassis Pair
Product Type
Cat. No.
Description
Controllers
1756-L61, 1756L62, 1756-L63,
1756-L64
ControlLogix controllers
1756-L63XT
ControlLogix-XT controller
1756-L65
ControlLogix controller
This component is available with enhanced redundancy
systems, revision 19.052 or later.
1756-L72, 1756L73, 1756-L74,
1756-L75
ControlLogix controllers
This component is available with enhanced redundancy
systems, revision 19.053 or later.
1756-L71
ControlLogix controller
This component is available with enhanced redundancy
systems, revision 20.054 or later.
1756-L73XT
ControlLogix-XT controller, revision 19.053 or later
Power supplies
Page
29
1756-PA72, 1756- ControlLogix AC power supplies
PA75
1756-PB72, 1756- ControlLogix DC power supplies
PB75, 1756-PC75,
1756-PH75
1756-PAXT, 1756- ControlLogix-XT AC power supply
PBXT
IMPORTANT
1756-PA75R
ControlLogix AC redundant power supply
1756-PB75R
ControlLogix DC redundant power supply
1756-CPR
ControlLogix redundant power supply cable
1756-PSCA2
ControlLogix chassis adapter module
34
There are module series level, firmware revision, and software version
requirements for enhanced redundancy systems.
For more information on these series level, firmware revision, and version
requirements, see the current release notes at:
http://rockwellautomation.com/literature.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
25
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
This graphic shows an example ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system,
revision 19.053 or later, that uses EtherNet/IP networks.
Figure 1 - Example ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System, Revision 19.053 or later, Using an
EtherNet/IP Network
Workstation
EtherNet/IP
Switch
Redundant Chassis Pair
CH2 CH1 OK
1715 Redundant I/O
26
2
2
CH2 CH1 OK
1756 ControlLogix I/O
1734 POINT I/O™
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
PowerFlex® Drive Connected via
1783-ETAP
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
This graphic shows an example ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system,
revision 19.053 or later, that uses ControlNet networks.
Figure 2 - Example ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System, Revision 19.053 or later, Using a
ControlNet Network
Workstation
EtherNet/IP
Switch
Redundant Chassis Pair
CH2 CH1 OK
2
CH2 CH1 OK
1756 ControlLogix I/O
1734 POINT I/O
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
PowerFlex 700S drive connected via
1788-CNCR card
27
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Redundant Chassis
You can use any ControlLogix or ControlLogix-XT chassis in a redundant chassis
pair as long as the two chassis used are the same size. For example, if the primary
chassis in your redundant chassis pair uses a 1756-A4 chassis, the secondary
chassis must use a 1756-A4 chassis.
You can use the 1756-A4LXT chassis with the enhanced redundancy system,
revision 19.052 or later. For a list of the ControlLogix chassis available for use in
an enhanced redundancy system, see Table 4 on page 24.
TIP
When using 1756-L7x controllers in your system, you must use revision 19.053
or later.
Redundant Chassis Configuration Requirements
These configuration parameters must match for the components in a redundant
chassis pair during normal system operation:
• Module type
• Chassis size
• Slot placement
• Firmware revision
• Series level. See page 32.
Figure 3 - Example of Redundant Chassis Pair
0
1
2
3
CH2 CH1 OK
28
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
0
1
CH2 CH1 OK
2
3
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
Controllers in Redundant Chassis
Remember these points when placing controllers in the redundant chassis pair:
• Controllers are typically included, but not required, in enhanced
redundancy systems.
• The differences between controller types are described in this table.
Table 5 - Controller Features
Feature
1756-L7x Controllers
1756-L6x Controllers
Clock support and backup used for
memory retention at powerdown
Energy Storage Module (ESM)
Battery
Communication ports (built-in)
USB
Serial
Connections, controller
500
250
Logix CPU (processor)
Dual-core
Single-core
Memory, nonvolatile
Secure Digital (SD) card
CompactFlash card
Status display and status indicators
Scrolling status display and four
status indicators
6 status indicators
Unconnected buffer defaults
20 (40, max)
10 (40, max)
• You can place up to two controllers in the same chassis. When you use two
controllers in the same chassis, they must be of the same product family.
For example, you cannot place a1756-L6x controller and a 1756-L7x
controller in the same chassis.
IMPORTANT
When using a ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system, revision
16.081 or earlier, you cannot use two 1756-L64 controllers in the same
chassis. You can, however, use a 1756-L64 controller in the same
chassis as a 1756-L61, 1756-L62, or 1756-L63 controller.
• You can use different catalog numbers from the same product family in the
same chassis. For example, you can use two 1756-L6x controllers in a
chassis.
• Each controller must have enough data memory to store twice the amount
of tag data associated with a redundant controller project.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
29
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
• Each controller must have enough I/O memory to store twice the amount
of I/O memory used. To check the I/O memory used and available, access
the Memory tab of the Controller Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000
software.
For more information about data and I/O memory, see Knowledgebase
Answer ID 28972.
• When you use the redundancy system update (RSU) feature to update an
enhanced redundancy system while the system continues operation, the
updated secondary controllers must provide the same or greater memory
than the primary controllers.
A secondary controller provides greater memory than the primary
controller if it is a higher catalog number, for example, a 1756-L63 primary
controller and a 1756-L65 secondary controller.
This table describes the secondary controllers to which you can upgrade,
based on the primary controller used, when using RSU.
Table 6 - Controller Compatibility
Primary Controller
Compatible Secondary Controller
1756-L61
1756-L61, 1756-L62, 1756-L63, 1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L62
1756-L62, 1756-L63, 1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L63
1756-L63, 1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L64
1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L65
1756-L65
1756-L71
1756-L71, 1756-L72, 1756-L73, 1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L72
1756-L72, 1756-L73, 1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L73
1756-L73, 1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L74
1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L75
1756-L75
Differences in controller types between chassis can exist only during the
system upgrade process. When you complete the system upgrade, the
controllers in the redundant chassis pair must match for the system to
synchronize.
For more information on using RSU, see Appendix C, Upgrade from a
Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy
System on page 239.
• In an enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later, the 1756-L65
controller’s performance differs from that of the 1756-L64 controller.
Some controller operations can take slightly longer for the 1756-L65
controller to complete.
For example, in some applications the 1756-L65 controller can experience
longer scan times than the 1756-L64 controller.
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
Plan for Controller Connections
Consider these conditions when planning controller connection use:
• 1756-L6x controllers provide 250 total connections.
• 1756-L7x controllers provide 500 total connections.
If you use the redundant controller at, or very near the connection limits, you can
experience difficulty synchronizing your chassis.
Redundancy Modules in Redundant Chassis
Two redundancy modules, one in each chassis of the redundant chassis pair,
jointly supervise the control system operating states and transitions, establishing
the framework for system redundancy. This bridge between chassis facilitates the
exchange of control data and synchronization of operations.
The redundancy modules let you commission the redundant system in a plugand-play manner without any programming. You connect a redundancy module
pair with the default configuration in the redundant chassis pair and set up the
redundant system.
You can establish redundancy between chassis in either of these manners:
• Inserting a redundancy module pair into two powered chassis that contain
redundancy-compliant components and redundancy-enabled application
programs, and then connecting the redundancy modules.
• Inserting and connecting the redundancy modules in two chassis and then
inserting redundancy-compliant components into each chassis.
IMPORTANT
You are not required to develop any programming to migrate from a
nonredundant to an enhanced redundancy system if your application meets
these conditions:
• Your application meets the points listed in Restrictions on page 22.
• The controller properties in your RSLogix 5000 software project has
Redundancy enabled.
Once the redundant chassis pair contains all desired components, including
controllers configured for redundancy, and are powered, no further tasks are
required in the redundancy modules to activate system redundancy. The
redundancy modules automatically determine the operational state of each of the
chassis pair and are ready to accept commands and provide system monitoring.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
31
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Communication Modules in Redundant Chassis
Remember these points when placing ControlLogix ControlNet and
EtherNet/IP communication modules in the redundant chassis pair:
• You must use enhanced communication modules in enhanced redundancy
systems. Enhanced communication modules contain a ‘2’ in their catalog
number. For example, the 1756-EN2T module.
Standard ControlNet and EtherNet/IP communication modules are not
supported.
• You can use the 1756-EN2TR module only with an enhanced
redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later.
• You can use any combination of up to seven enhanced communication
modules in each redundant chassis.
• If you use a ControlNet network in your redundant chassis pair, you must
have two ControlNet communication modules outside the redundant
chassis pair. When assigning node address numbers, assign the lowest node
number address to a ControlNet communication module outside the
redundant chassis pair.
For more information, see Use at Least Four ControlNet Network Nodes
on page 38 through Assign Lowest Node Numbers to Remote ControlNet
Modules on page 39.
• You cannot use Series A ControlNet communication modules in a
redundancy system.
• The Series for EtherNet/IP communication modules is not required to
match in a partnered set. However, if your application requires a feature
specific to a module series level, you must use the same series level for each
module in a partnered set.
For example, only the 1756-EN2T/C communication module only offers
the double-data rate (DDR) feature. You must use 1756-EN2T/C
modules in each chassis of the redundant chassis pair to use DDR.
• Do not use the USB ports of communication modules to access the
redundant system network while the system is running, that is, online.
Using the USB ports while online can result in a loss of communication
after a switchover.
For a list of the ControlLogix communication modules available for use in an
enhanced redundancy system, see Table 4 on page 24.
32
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
Plan for Communication Module Connections
A CIP connection is a point-to-point communication mechanism used to
transfer data between a producer and a consumer. These are examples of CIP
connections:
• Logix5000 controller message transfer to Logix5000 controller
• I/O or produced tag
• Program upload
• RSLinx DDE/OPC client
• PanelView™ polling of a Logix5000 controller
ControlLogix ControlNet communication modules provide 131 total CIP
connections. Consider these points when using CIP connections with
ControlLogix ControlNet communication modules:
• Three of the 131 CIP connections are reserved for redundancy. The three
redundant-system CIP connections always appear to be in use, even when
no connections are open.
• You can use the remaining 128 CIP connections in any manner that your
application requires, such as the examples listed above.
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP communication modules provide 259 total CIP
connections. Consider these points when using CIP connections with
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP communication modules:
• Three of the 259 CIP connections are reserved for redundancy.
• You can use the remaining 256 connections in any manner that your
application requires, such as the examples listed above.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
33
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Power Supplies and Redundant Power Supplies in Enhanced
Redundancy Systems
You can use any of the standard or redundant power supplies listed in
Components Available for Use in a Redundant Chassis Pair on page 24 in an
enhanced redundancy system.
Redundant Power Supplies
Typically, enhanced redundancy systems use standard power supplies. You can
choose to use redundant power supplies to maintain power to a ControlLogix
chassis in the event that one of the supplies loses power. Use these hardware
components to connect redundant power supplies:
• Two redundant power supplies for each chassis
• One 1756-PSCA chassis adapter module for each redundant chassis
• Two 1756-CPR cables for each redundant chassis to connect the power
supplies to the 1756-PSCA adapter
• Optional, user-supplied annunciator wiring to connect the power supplies
to remote input modules
Figure 4 - Redundant Power Supplies with Redundant Chassis
1756-PA75R or 1756-PB75R Power Supplies
Annunciator Wiring
(optional)
1756-CPR
Cables
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
2
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
2
1756-CPR
Cables
For more information about redundant power supplies, see the ControlLogix
Selection Guide, publication 1756-SG001.
34
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
EtherNet/IP Networks with
Redundant Systems
Chapter 2
The use of EtherNet/IP networks in an enhanced redundancy system is primarily
dependent on your system revision.
IMPORTANT
A remote chassis can be accessed over an EtherNet/IP network using any
EtherNet/IP module that works in a nonredundant chassis with no additional
firmware requirement with the following exception. If the remote chassis
contains a controller consuming a tag produced in the RCP, it can only consume
the tag with the required firmware revisions listed in Table 7.
Table 7 - EtherNet/IP Communication Modules in Remote Chassis Minimum Firmware
Requirements
EtherNet/IP Communication Module in Remote
Chassis
Minimum Firmware Revision
1756-EN2F
4.003
1756-EN2T
1756-EN2TR
4.002
1756-EN3TR
1756-ENBT
6.001
1768-ENBT
4.001
1769-L2x
1769-L3xE
1788-ENBT
19.011
3.001
For more information on using an EtherNet/IP network in your enhanced
redundancy system, see Chapter 5, Configure the ControlNet Network on
page 93.
EtherNet/IP Network Features in an Enhanced Redundancy System,
Revision 19.052 or Later
In an enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later, you can execute
these tasks on an EtherNet/IP network:
• Use 1756-EN2TR modules
• Connect to remote I/O modules
• Connect to 1715 Redundant I/O systems
• Use produce/consume tags
• Connect to a Device-level Ring networks
• Use CIP Sync technology
The rest of the topics in this section apply to all enhanced redundancy systems.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
35
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
IP Address Swapping
EtherNet/IP communication modules can use IP address swapping to swap IP
addresses during a switchover. You must use this feature to use Ethernet I/O
connections.
For more information on IP address swapping, see Chapter 5, Configure the
ControlNet Network on page 93.
Unicast Functionality
Enhanced redundancy systems support unicast produced tags. Unicast consumed
tags are not supported in enhanced redundancy systems. Unicast I/O is not
supported in a redundancy system.
Possible Communication Delays on EtherNet/IP Networks
Brief communication delays can occur for certain connection types if the
connection between a component and the redundant chassis pair uses a path
exclusively over an EtherNet/IP network and a switchover occurs. After the
switchover is complete, communication resumes automatically.
These connection types can experience the communication delay when the
switchover occurs:
• HMI to redundant chassis pair
• FactoryTalk Batch server to redundant chassis pair
• FactoryTalk Alarms and Events Service to redundant chassis pair
Bridge from an EtherNet/IP network to a ControlNet network if you must
maintain the connection between the component and a redundant chassis pair in
the event of a switchover.
See HMI Blind Time Reduction on Ethernet During a Switchover on page 21.
36
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
This example graphic shows the recommended method to connect an HMI to a
redundant chassis pair if connection drops are a concern in your application. In
this graphic, the remote chassis contains I/O modules in addition to the
EtherNet/IP and ControlNet communication modules. The I/O modules are
not required and included here for example purposes only.
Figure 5 - Configuration Used to Eliminate Communication Delays on Switchover
HMI
EtherNet/IP
ControlNet
Redundant Chassis Pair
CH2 CH1 OK
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
CH2 CH1 OK
37
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
ControlNet Networks with
Redundant Systems
ControlNet networks are used to connect redundant control chassis to remote
I/O and to other devices in the system.
IMPORTANT
A remote chassis can be accessed over a ControlNet network using any
ControlNet module that works in a nonredundant chassis with no additional
firmware requirement.
ControlNet Network Requirements
If you use a ControlNet network in your enhanced redundancy system, you
must take these considerations into account when using ControlNet networks in
your enhanced redundancy system:
• Use at Least Four ControlNet Network Nodes
• Assign Lowest Node Numbers to Remote ControlNet Modules
• Set Partnered ControlNet Module Switches to the Same Address
• Reserve Consecutive Node Addresses for Partner Modules
Use at Least Four ControlNet Network Nodes
With redundant systems, at least four ControlNet network nodes are required.
This is because two or more ControlNet nodes must be used in addition to the
two ControlNet modules used in the redundant chassis. One of the two nodes
outside of the redundant chassis must be at a lower node address than the
ControlNet modules in the redundant chassis.
If your ControlNet uses less than four nodes, in the event of a switchover,
connections can be dropped and outputs connected to that node can change state
during the switchover.
You can include these ControlNet modules in addition to redundant
ControlNet nodes:
• ControlNet bridge modules in remote chassis
• Any other ControlNet devices on the ControlNet network
• A workstation running RSLinx Classic communication software that is
connected via a ControlNet network
38
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
Assign Lowest Node Numbers to Remote ControlNet Modules
Do not assign the lowest ControlNet node addresses to ControlNet modules in
the redundant chassis pair.
If you assign the lowest ControlNet node addresses to ControlNet modules in
the redundant chassis pair, you can experience these system behaviors:
• Upon a switchover, you can lose communication with I/O modules,
produced tags, and consumed tags.
• Removing a ControlNet module from the redundant chassis can result in
lost communication with I/O modules, produced tags, and consumed
tags.
• If the entire system loses power, you can be required to cycle power to the
primary chassis to restore communication.
Set Partnered ControlNet Module Switches to the Same Address
Where ControlNet modules are used as partners in a redundant chassis pair, you
must set the node address switches to the same node address. The primary
ControlNet modules can be at even or odd node addresses.
For example, if partnered ControlNet modules are assigned to nodes 12 and 13
of the ControlNet network, set the node address switches of the modules to the
same address of 12.
Figure 6 - Example of Switch Address for Partnered ControlNet Modules
ControlNet Module Switches
CH2 CH1 OK
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
CH2 CH1 OK
39
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Reserve Consecutive Node Addresses for Partner Modules
Where ControlNet modules are used as partners in redundant chassis, plan
consecutive node numbers for those partnered modules. Plan for consecutive
node addresses because the redundant system automatically assigns the
consecutive node address to the secondary ControlNet module.
For example, partnered ControlNet modules with address switches set at 12 are
assigned ControlNet node numbers 12 and 13 by the system.
TIP
The primary chassis always assumes the lower of the two node addresses.
Figure 7 - Example of Redundant ControlNet Modules at Consecutive Addresses
ControlNet Module Switches
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
Node 12
40
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Node 13
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
Redundant ControlNet Media
The use of redundant ControlNet media helps to prevent a loss of
communication if a trunkline or tap is severed or disconnected. A system that
uses redundant ControlNet media uses these components:
• 1756-CN2R/B communication modules in each redundant chassis
• ControlNet modules designed for redundant media at each ControlNet
node on the network
• Redundant trunk cabling
• Redundant tap connections for each ControlNet module connected
Figure 8 - Redundant ControlNet Media with Redundant ControlLogix Chassis
Redundant ControlLogix Chassis with
1756-CN2R Modules
Workstation with ControlNet
Interface Card
Redundant Trunk Lines
1785-L80C15
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
41
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Other Communication
Networks
You can use only EtherNet/IP and ControlNet networks, and corresponding
modules, in enhanced redundancy systems.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the redundant chassis to bridge between networks. Bridging
through the redundant chassis to the same or different networks, or routing
messages through redundant chassis is not supported.
You can bridge to other communication networks outside of the redundant
chassis. For example, you can bridge to a Universal Remote I/O network via a
remote chassis.
Figure 9 - Example of Bridging to Remote I/O on Various Networks
HMI
Workstation
Ethernet
Switch
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
Chassis Bridge from ControlNet to Remote I/
O Networks
To Universal I/O Network
To EtherNet/IP Network
IMPORTANT: Cannot bridge to
I/O modules.
42
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
To DeviceNet Network
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
You can bridge these networks via a remote chassis:
• ControlNet
• DeviceNet
• EtherNet/IP
• Universal Remote I/O
• Data Highway Plus
This table indicates what system components can be used with each network
connected to a redundant system.
Table 8 - Communication Networks Available For Use with Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Network
Connection to Redundant System
Component
I/O
HMI
Directly to redundant chassis
Yes
Yes
Via a bridge
No
Yes
DeviceNet
Via a bridge
Yes
Yes
EtherNet/IP
Directly to redundant chassis
Yes - Enhanced
Redundancy System,
Revision 19.052 or later
Yes(1)
Via a bridge
No
Yes
Universal Remote I/O
Via a bridge
Yes
Yes
Data Highway Plus
Via a bridge
Yes
Yes
ControlNet
(1) To avoid a brief loss of communication with the redundant chassis pair in the event of a switchover, we recommend
that you connect the HMI to the redundant chassis pair via a bridge from an EtherNet/IP network to a ControlNet
network. For more information see Possible Communication Delays on EtherNet/IP Networks on page 36.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
43
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
I/O Placement
In an enhanced redundancy system, you can place I/O modules in these
locations:
• Same ControlNet network as redundant controllers and communication
modules
• Same EtherNet/IP network as redundant controllers and communication
modules
• DeviceNet network connected via a bridge
• Universal Remote I/O network connected via a bridge
IMPORTANT
You cannot install I/O modules in the redundant chassis pair. You can only
install I/O modules in remote locations accessed over the networks in this list.
You can connect to remote I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network in an
enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later.
1715 Redundant I/O Systems
Beginning with the enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later, you
can connect to 1715 Redundant I/O systems over an EtherNet/IP network.
The 1715 Redundant I/O system lets a controller communicate to a remote,
redundant I/O chassis over an EtherNet/IP network. The 1715 Redundant I/O
system provides high availability and redundancy for critical processes by using a
redundant adapter pair and multiple I/O modules that have diagnostics and are
easily replaceable.
The 1715 Redundant I/O system consists of a single, two-slot, adapter base unit
that houses a redundant adapter module pair. The adapter base unit is connected
to up to 8, three-slot, I/O base units, that can hold up to 24 fully-configurable
digital and analog I/O modules. You can configure a 1715 Redundant I/O
system in a Ring or Star topology.
Each 1715 Redundant I/O system uses a single IP address as the primary IP
address for all communication. The redundant adapter module pair consists of
two active modules, a primary adapter module and its partner, a secondary
module.
44
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
Figure 10 - Example of I/O Placement Options
Workstation
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP
Switch
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
EtherNet/IP
Bridging Chassis
1734 POINT I/O
1715 Redundant I/O
ControlNet
DeviceNet Device
Control Tower
1771 Chassis with
1771-ASB
DeviceNet
Universal Remote I/O
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
45
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Using HMI
Depending on the network used to connect the redundant system to HMIs, plan
for certain placement and configuration requirements. You can connect an HMI
to a primary chassis over either of these networks:
• EtherNet/IP
• ControlNet
HMI Connected via an EtherNet/IP Network
This table describes redundant system considerations specific to the HMI being
used on the EtherNet/IP network.
Type of HMI Used
Considerations
PanelView Standard terminal
Same as a nonredundant system.
• PanelView Plus terminal
• VersaView® industrial computer running
a Windows CE operating system
• Use RSLinx Enterprise software, version 5.0 or later.
• Set aside connections for each PanelView Plus or VersaView CE
terminal as indicated in this table.
In this module
Reserve
Controller
5 connections
1756-EN2T
5 connections
FactoryTalk View Supervisory Edition
software with RSLinx Enterprise software
• Use RSLinx Enterprise communication software, version 5.0 or later.
• Keep the HMI and both redundant chassis on the same subnet.
• Configure the network to use IP swapping.
• FactoryTalk View Supervisory Edition
software with RSLinx Classic software,
version 2.52 or later
• RSView®32 software
• Any other HMI client software that uses
RSLinx Classic software, version 2.52 or
later
Limit the number of RSLinx servers that a controller uses to 1…3
servers, where the use of 1 server is ideal.
HMI connected to a redundant chassis pair exclusively over an EtherNet/IP
network can briefly drop the connection when a switchover occurs. The
connection is re-established, however, after the switchover is complete.
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 2
HMI Connected via a ControlNet Network
This table describes redundant system considerations specific to the HMI being
used on the ControlNet network.
Type of HMI Used
Considerations
• PanelView Standard terminal
• PanelView 1000e or PanelView 1400e
terminal
• If your HMI communicates via unscheduled communication, use
four terminals per controller.
• If your HMI does not communicate via unscheduled
communication, use the number of terminals required for your
application.
• PanelView Plus terminal
• VersaView industrial computer running a
Windows CE operating system
Set aside connections for each PanelView Plus or VersaView CE
terminal.
• FactoryTalk View Supervisory Edition
software with RSLinx Classic software,
version 2.52 or later
• RSView32 software
• Any other HMI client software that uses
RSLinx Classic software, version 2.52 or
later
In this module
Reserve
Controller
5 connections
1756-CN2/B,
1756-CN2R/B
5 connections
Limit the number of RSLinx servers that a controller uses to 1 (ideal) to
3 (maximum).
HMI connected to a primary chassis exclusively over a ControlNet network or
bridge from an EtherNet/IP network to a ControlNet network maintains its
connections during a switchover.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
47
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Connection from HMI Over a ControlNet Network shows an example of
connecting an HMI to a primary controller over a ControlNet network.
Figure 11 - Connection from HMI Over a ControlNet Network
HMI
ControlNet
Redundant Chassis Pair
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
ControlNet
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
For an example of how to connect an HMI to a redundant chassis pair over a path
that bridges from an EtherNet/IP network to a ControlNet network, see
Configuration Used to Eliminate Communication Delays on Switchover on
page 37.
48
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Firmware Requirements
Chapter 2
If you are using an enhanced redundancy system, use only enhanced redundancy
system firmware. These are the enhanced redundancy system firmware-revision
bundles:
• 16.054Enh
• 16.080Enh
• 16.081Enh
• 16.081_kit1
• 19.052Enh
• 19.053Enh
• 19.053_kit1
• 20.054
• 20.054_kit1
To download the most recent enhanced redundancy system firmware bundle, go
to http://www.rockwellautomation/support.com.
Software Requirements
These sections describe required and optional software for use with your
enhanced redundancy system.
Required Software
This software is required to use all enhanced redundancy system revisions:
• RSLogix 5000 software.
• RSLinx Classic communication software.
• Redundancy Module Configuration Tool (RMCT) - This utility is
installed when you install RSLinx Classic communication software.
For the most current software versions, go to http://www.rockwellautomation/
support.com.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
49
Chapter 2
Design an Enhanced Redundancy System
Optional Software
Software in addition to that listed as required software can be needed depending
on your enhanced redundancy system program, configuration, and components.
Optional software you might need is listed in this table.
If using
Then use this software
ControlNet network
RSNetWorx™ for ControlNet™
EtherNet/IP network
RSNetWorx™ for EtherNet/IP
Alarms
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Batches or recipes
FactoryTalk Batch
HMI(1)
• FactoryTalk View Site Edition
• RSLinx Enterprise software
• RSView32
Various FactoryTalk services
FactoryTalk Services Platform
(1) See Using HMI on page 46 for additional information.
50
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Before You Begin
Topic
Page
Before You Begin
51
Install an Enhanced Redundancy System
53
Step 1: Install the Software
53
Step 2: Install the Hardware
54
Step 3: Connect the Redundancy Modules via a Fiber-optic Cable
63
Step 4: Update Redundant Chassis Firmware
67
Step 5: Designate the Primary and Secondary Chassis
71
Complete these tasks before you install the enhanced redundancy system:
• Verify that you have the components required to install your system.
• Read and understand the safety and environmental considerations
explained in each component’s installation instruction publication.
• Order a 1756-RMCx fiber-optic communication cable if you do not have
one.
• If you choose to make your own fiber-optic cable for lengths not supported
by 1756-RMCx catalog numbers, refer to Fiber-optic Cable on page 67.
Enhanced Redundancy System Quick Start
Refer to these Quick Start steps when setting up your system for the first time.
1. Install/update the workstation software and firmware bundle. (Refer
to Step 1: Install the Software on page 53.)
Software applications needed include:
• RSLogix 5000 software
• RSLinx Classic communication software
• Redundancy Module Configuration Tool (RMCT). See Install the
Software on page 53
IMPORTANT
If RSLinx Classic software is already on your system, make sure to shut it down
before installing/upgrading software.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
51
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
2. To begin the hardware installation, determine the location of your
modules in the system’s chassis. Plug in the communication modules,
controller and redundancy modules into the chassis, matching partners
slot for slot. See Step 2: Install the Hardware on page 54.
Install the following:
• The first chassis and power supply, see page 54.
• The first chassis communication modules, see page 56.
a.Determine the IP address for your Ethernet communication modules.
Each Ethernet communication module will have the same IP address.
Be sure to reserve the next Ethernet IP address in series for the
secondary controller to use in the case of a switchover. (For example,
192.105.1.5 and 192.105.1.6.)
b.Set both Ethernet communication modules to the same IP address.
(This rule also applies to ControlNet networks.) See Configure the
EtherNet/IP Network on page 77.
• The first chassis controller, see page 56.
• The first chassis redundancy module, see page 57.
• The second chassis, power supply, communication modules, controller
and redundancy module. See page 63.
3. Plug in the fiber-optic communication cable to connect the redundancy
modules in both chassis. See Step 3: Connect the Redundancy Modules
via a Fiber-optic Cable on page 63.
4. Upgrade the redundant chassis firmware. See Step 4: Update Redundant
Chassis Firmware on page 67.
• Update the firmware to the modules in the first chassis.
• Apply power to the first chassis.
• Launch ControlFLASH software and upgrade the firmware.
• Upgrade the redundancy module’s firmware and verify that the status is
PRIM.
• Update all remaining modules in the chassis using ControlFLASH
software.
• Power off the first chassis.
• Power on the second chassis.
• Follow the same update process as the first chassis.
• Power off the second chassis.
5. Designate the primary chassis. See Step 5: Designate the Primary and
Secondary Chassis on page 71.
• Verify power is removed from both chassis.
• Apply power to the chassis you want designated as the primary. Wait for
the status indicator to display PRIM.
• Apply power to the chassis you want designated as the secondary.
52
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Install an Enhanced
Redundancy System
Chapter 3
The following steps detail the installation process for an enhanced redundancy
system. They also explain how to install the redundant modules. These steps
include the following.
1. Installing the software
2. Installing the hardware
3. Connecting the fiber-optic communication cable to the redundancy
modules
4. Updating the firmware
5. Designating a primary and secondary chassis
Step 1: Install the Software
These steps detail the installation process for an enhanced redundancy system.
Before you download and update software for use with your redundant system,
use one of these methods to fully shutdown RSLinx Classic software:
• Right-click the RSLinx Classic icon in the notification area of the screen
and choose Shutdown RSLinx Classic.
• With RSLinx Classic software open, from the File menu choose Exit and
Shutdown.
Install the Software
Obtain and install the software required for your redundant system
configuration and application. This includes the latest redundancy firmware
version bundle with the RMCT. For more information on required software
versions for redundant system configuration, see Software Requirements on
page 49.
Use the installation instructions or release notes provided with each software
version for installation procedures and requirements.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
53
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
IMPORTANT
When using the 1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT module, you must use version
8.01.05 or later of the RMCT.
TIP
When the redundancy module firmware is upgraded, the RMCT is updated.
The RMCT automatically uses the version that is compatible with the
redundancy module firmware revision installed.
Add the EDS Files
Some modules have the EDS files already installed. However, if needed, obtain
EDS files for modules in your system from the Rockwell Automation Support
website at: http://www.rockwellautomation.com/resources/eds/.
Once you have downloaded the required EDS file, launch the EDS Hardware
Configuration Tool by choosing Start > Programs > Rockwell Software® >
RSLinx Tools > EDS Hardware Installation Tool.
The tool then prompts you to Add or Remove EDS files.
Step 2: Install the Hardware
Follow these steps to set up and install your system’s hardware components.
Install the First Chassis and its Components
When you install an enhanced redundancy system, install one chassis, and its
necessary components, at a time.
Module Placement and Partnering
Each pair of controllers and communication modules must be comprised of
compatible partner modules. Two modules in the same slot are considered as
compatible partners only if they contain compatible hardware and firmware and
other rules that can be enforced by the module itself. The compatibility status
(Compatible or Incompatible) is determined by either the module in the primary
chassis or its partner in the secondary chassis.
The redundancy module pair must occupy the same slots in their respective
chassis. The redundancy module pair does not consider the chassis pair to be
partnered if the redundancy modules are placed in different slots, even if the
partners of other modules are present in the same slot.
54
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
The redundancy module prevents certain redundancy operations, such as
Qualification, if incompatible modules reside in the
redundant-control chassis pair.
IMPORTANT
For best performance, place the redundancy module in the chassis as close as
possible to the controller.
Complete these tasks to install the first chassis in the redundant chassis pair:
• Install the Chassis and Power Supply
• Install the Communication Modules
• Install a Controller
• Install the Redundancy Module
TIP
Do not apply power to the system until both chassis and their components are
installed.
Then follow the steps described in Step 4: Update Redundant Chassis Firmware
on page 67 to determine when to power each chassis.
Install the Chassis and Power Supply
Use the installation information provided with the chassis and power supply, or
redundant power supplies, to install them in an enhanced redundancy system.
Table 9 - Installation Information for ControlLogix Chassis and Power Supplies
Product Type
Cat. No.
Publication
Chassis and power
supplies
1756-A4, 1756-A7, 1756-A10, 1756-A13, 1756-A17, 1756-A4LXT, 1756A5XT, 1756-A7LXT, 1756-A7XT, 1756-PA72, 1756-PB72, 1756-PA75, 1756PB75, 1756-PC75, 1756-PH75, 1756-PAXT, 1756-PBXT, 1756-PA75R, 1756PB75R, 1756-PSCA2
ControlLogix Chassis and Power Supplies Installation Instructions,
publication 1756-IN005
For more information on using chassis and power supplies in an enhanced
redundancy system, see Components of an Enhanced Redundancy System on
page 24.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
55
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Install the Communication Modules
Use the installation information provided with the communication modules to
install them in an enhanced redundancy system.
Table 10 - Communication Module Installation
Product Type
Cat. No.
ControlNet
communication
modules
1756-CN2/B
1756-CN2R/B
1756-CN2RXT
EtherNet/IP
communication
modules
Publication
ControlNet Modules Installation Instructions,
publication CNET-IN005
1756-EN2T
1756-EN2TR
1756-EN2F
EtherNet/IP Modules Installation Instructions,
publication ENET-IN002
1756-EN2TXT
For more information on using communication modules in an enhanced
redundancy system, see Communication Modules in Redundant Chassis on
page 32.
Install a Controller
Use the installation information in the ControlLogix System User Manual,
publication 1756-UM001, to complete the following for your controller:
• Installation in an enhanced redundancy system
• Determination of compatibility for planned primary and secondary
controllers in the redundant chassis, see Table 6 on page 30
IMPORTANT
The ControlLogix-XT controllers function in the same way as the traditional
controllers. The ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication
system components that are conformally coated for extended protection in
harsh, corrosive environments:
• When used with FLEX I/O-XT™ products, the ControlLogix-XT system can
withstand temperature ranges from -20…70 °C (-4…158 °F).
• When used independently, the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand
temperature ranges from -25…70 °C (-13…158 °F).
For more information on using controllers in an enhanced redundancy system,
see Controllers in Redundant Chassis on page 29.
56
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
Install the Redundancy Module
You must install one redundancy module in each chassis planned for your system.
Available modules are as follows:
• 1756-RM2/A
• 1756-RM2XT
• 1756-RM/A
• 1756-RM/B
• 1756-RMXT
IMPORTANT
Do not connect the primary redundancy module to the secondary redundancy
module until all other components used in the redundant chassis pair are
installed.
IMPORTANT
Keep the redundancy module as close as possible to the controller module.
IMPORTANT
1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT modules can only be used with other
1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT modules. You cannot mix 1756-RM2/A and
1756-RM2XT modules with 1756-RM/A, 1756-RM/B, or 1756-RMXT modules.
Installation Requirements
Before you install the module, be sure to note the following:
• Understand redundant systems and redundant media
• Verify that the planned modules for each redundant chassis of the pair are
identical - including firmware revisions
• Verify that your enhanced redundancy firmware revision is compatible
with your planned redundant chassis modules
• The 1756-RM/B module offers a higher level of performance than a 1756RM/A module. Both modules can coexist in a redundant system, but the
highest system performance is achieved when the 1756-RM/B modules
are used together when used in conjunction with a 1756-L7x controller.
• The 1756-RM2/A module, when used in conjunction with a 1756-L7x
controller, offers higher crossload speeds than the 1756-RM/B module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
57
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Environment and Enclosure
ATTENTION: This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category
II applications (as defined in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio
communication services in such environments.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for
those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting
from accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the
spread of flame, complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if nonmetallic. The interior
of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Rockwell Automation publication 1770-4.1, for additional
installation requirements
• NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosure
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
ATTENTION: This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal
operation. Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wrist strap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
WARNING: When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could
cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding. Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive
wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector. Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect
module operation.
European Hazardous Location Approval
The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to
comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
58
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified Rockwell Automation backplanes.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
Safety-related Programmable Electronic Systems
ATTENTION: Personnel responsible for the application of safety-related programmable electronic systems (PES) shall be aware of
the safety requirements in the application of the system and shall be trained in using the system.
Optical Ports
ATTENTION: Under certain conditions, viewing the optical port may expose the eye to hazard. When viewed under some
conditions, the optical port may expose the eye beyond the maximum permissible-exposure recommendations.
Small Form-factor Pluggable
WARNING: When you insert or remove the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver while power is on, an electrical
arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
59
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
North American Hazardous Location Approval
The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous
locations.
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class I
Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous
locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating
nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. When
combining products within a system, the most adverse temperature
code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help determine the overall
temperature code of the system. Combinations of equipment in your
system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having
Jurisdiction at the time of installation.
Informations sur l'utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à
une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A,
B, C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec
des marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code
de température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque
plusieurs produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de
température le plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible)
peut être utilisé pour déterminer le code de température global du
système. Les combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont
sujettes à inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment
de l'installation.
AVERTISSEMENT: EXPLOSION HAZARD
• Do not disconnect equipment unless
power has been removed or the area is
known to be nonhazardous.
• Do not disconnect connections to this
equipment unless power has been
removed or the area is known to be
nonhazardous. Secure any external
connections that mate to this equipment
by using screws, sliding latches, threaded
connectors, or other means provided with
this product.
• Substitution of components may impair
suitability for Class I, Division 2.
• If this product contains batteries, they
must only be changed in an area known to
be nonhazardous.
AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
l'environnement est classé non
dangereux avant de débrancher
l'équipement.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
l'environnement est classé non
dangereux avant de débrancher les
connecteurs. Fixer tous les
connecteurs externes reliés à cet
équipement à l'aide de vis, loquets
coulissants, connecteurs filetés ou
autres moyens fournis avec ce
produit.
• La substitution de composants peut
rendre cet équipement inadapté à
une utilisation en environnement de
Classe I, Division 2.
• S'assurer que l'environnement est
classé non dangereux avant de
changer les piles.
Laser Radiation Ports
ATTENTION: Class 1 laser product. Laser radiation is present when the system is open and interlocks bypassed. Only trained and
qualified personnel are allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment.
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
A redundant system is comprised of two ControlLogix redundancy modules
working together that supervise the operating states and state transitions that
establish the basic framework for redundancy operations. The redundant pairs
provide a bridge between chassis pairs that let other modules exchange control
data and synchronize their operations. This illustration identifies the external
features of the module.
Figure 12 - 1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT Modules
1756-RM2/A Module
1756-RM2XT Module
Top View
Top View
Front View
Front View
Status Indicators
Status Indicators
Side View
Side View
CH2 CH1
CH2 CH1
Backplane
Connector
Bottom View
Backplane
Connector
Bottom View
46057
32269-M
NOTE: SFP transceivers are pre-installed in the redundant fiber ports
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
61
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
1756-RM/A or 1756-RM/B Module
Figure 13 - 1756-RM/A or RM/B and 1756-RMXT Modules
1756-RMXT Module
Top View
Top View
Front View
Front View
Status Indicators
Status Indicators
Redundancy Module
PRI COM OK
Side View
Side View
LC Singlemode
Connector
Backplane
Connector
Bottom View
44487
LC Singlemode
Connector
Backplane
Connector
Bottom View
31941-M
To install the redundancy module, follow these steps.
1. Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis.
2. Slide the module into the chassis, making sure the module backplane
connector properly connects to the chassis backplane.
The module is properly installed when it is flush with other installed modules.
IMPORTANT
To remove the module, push on the locking clips at the top and bottom of each
module and slide the module out of the chassis.
IMPORTANT
If you are adding redundancy to an already operational ControlLogix system,
shut off your process to install the redundancy module. The first chassis you
install the redundancy module into and turn on, becomes the primary chassis.
You can also have to do the following:
• Use RSNetWorx software to configure keeper information in the secondary
ControlNet communication module if the master keeper for ControlNet
communication is in the primary chassis
• Enable redundancy in RSLogix 5000 software and remove any I/O modules
from the chassis
This completes the installation of the first chassis and its components. Chassis
power must remain off.
62
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
Install the Second Chassis
Once the first chassis and its components are installed, you can install the second
chassis of the redundant chassis pair.
Complete these tasks as described in the Install the First Chassis and its
Components section to install the second chassis:
• Install the Redundancy Module
• Install the Communication Modules
• Install a Controller
• Install the Redundancy Module
IMPORTANT
Step 3: Connect the
Redundancy Modules via a
Fiber-optic Cable
The components used in the first and second chassis must match exactly for the
system to synchronize.
Once the first and second chassis and their components are installed, you
connect the redundancy modules via the 1756-RMCx fiber-optic
communication cable. The cable is not included with the redundancy module.
Before installation, order this fiber-optic communication cable separately.
Redundancy cables available from Rockwell Automation include the following.
Table 11 - Fiber-optic Cable Length
Fiber Cable Cat. No.
Length
1756-RMC1
1 m (3.28 ft)
1756-RMC3
3 m (9.84 ft)
1756-RMC10
10 m (32.81 ft)
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
63
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
The cable connection is made at the bottom of the module in a downward
orientation. There is enough space between the transmit and receive connectors
so you can use the LC connector coupler. Using this coupler keeps the fiber-optic
cable from bending so you can connect and disconnect the cable without
removing the module from the chassis.
ATTENTION: Consider these points when connecting the fiber-optic cable:
• The redundancy module communication cable contains optical fibers. Avoid
making sharp bends in the cable. Install the cable in a location where it will
not be cut, run over, abraded, or otherwise damaged.
• The redundancy module contains a single-mode transmitter. Connecting this
module to a multi-mode port will damage any multi-mode devices.
• Under certain conditions, viewing the optical port can expose the eye to
hazard. When viewed under some conditions, the optical port can expose the
eye beyond the maximum permissible-exposure recommendations.
• Media redundancy is achieved by installing modules with redundant ports
and installing a redundant fiber cable system. If a cable failure occurs, or cable
is degraded, the system uses the redundant network.
• When using a redundant system, route the two trunk cables (A and B) so that
damage to one cable will not damage the other cable. This reduces both
cables being damaged at the same time.
• Redundant cabling can tolerate one or more faults on a single channel. If a
fault were to occur on both channels, the network operation would be
unpredictable.
64
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
Connect the Fiber-optic Communication Cable to Redundant
Channels
Follow this procedure to install the communication cable to redundant channels
for the 1756-RM2/A module.
IMPORTANT
The redundancy module communication cable contains optical fibers. Avoid
making sharp bends in the cable. Install the cable in a location where it will
not be cut, run over, abraded, or otherwise damaged.
1. Remove the black protective plug on the first redundancy module in the
redundant chassis pair.
2. Remove the protective caps from the cable.
3. Plug the cable connectors into the first redundancy module.
The ends must be inserted opposite each other.
4. If redundant fiber crossload cable is required, install the second fiber cable
into the remaining port.
5. The first end of the fiber cable should plug into the CH1 port on the first
chassis and the matching end should plug into the matching CH1 port on
the second chassis.
Logix5563
Redundancy Module
46059
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
65
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Connect the Fiber-optic Communication Cable to Single Channels
Follow this procedure to install the communication cable.
IMPORTANT
The redundancy module communication cable contains optical fibers. Avoid
making sharp bends in the cable. Install the cable in a location where it will
not be cut, run over, abraded, or otherwise damaged.
1. Remove the black protective plug on the first redundancy module in the
redundant chassis pair.
2. Remove the protective caps from the cable.
3. Plug the cable connector into the first redundancy module.
4. Plug the remaining cable-connector end to the second redundancy
module.
Logix5563
Redundancy Module
44493
66
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
Fiber-optic Cable
If you choose to make your own fiber-optic cables, consider the following:
• Fiber-optic Communication Cable Specifications
Attribute
1756-RM2/A
1756-RM2XT
1756-RM/A or 1756-RM/B
1756-RMXT
Temperature,
operating
0…60 °C (32…140 °F)
-25…70 °C (-13…158 °F)
0…60 °C (32…140 °F)
-25…70 °C (-13…158 °F)
Connector type
LC-type (fiber-optic)
Cable type
8.5/125 micron single-mode fiber-optic cable
Channels
1 (transmit and receive fiber)
Length, max
10 km (10,000 m, 10936.13 yd
4 km (4000 m, 4,374.45 yd)(1)
Transmission
1000 Mbps
Less than or equal to 100 Mbps
Wavelength
1310 nm
1300 nm
SFP transceiver
Transceiver Rockwell PN-91972
Connector/cable: LC duplex connector, 1000BASE-LX-compliant
—
—
(1) Longer distances are supported based on the systems’ optical power budget. See the Optical Power Budget Ranges on page 67.
• Determine Optical Power Budget
You can determine the maximum optical-power budget in decibels (dB)
for a fiber-optic link by computing the difference between the minimum
transmitter-output optical power (dBm avg) and the lowest receiver
sensitivity (dBm avg).
The optical-power budget provides the necessary optical-signal range to
establish a working fiber-optic link. You must account for the cable lengths
and the corresponding link penalties. All penalties that affect the link
performance must be accounted for within the link optical power budget.
Table 12 - Optical Power Budget Ranges
Transmitter
Min
Typical
Max
Unit
Output optical power
-15
—
-8
dBm
Wavelength
1261
—
1360
nm
Receiver
Min
Typical
Max
Unit
Receiver sensitivity
—
-38
-3
dBm avg
Receiver overload
-8
—
—
dbm avg
Input operating wavelength
1261
—
1580
nm
Step 4: Update Redundant
Chassis Firmware
Use ControlFLASH software to upgrade the firmware of each module in
each chassis.
IMPORTANT
Apply power ONLY to the chassis containing modules on which you are
upgrading firmware.
Upgrade firmware on only one module at a time.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
67
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
IMPORTANT
Redundancy module firmware contained in the enhanced redundancy system
firmware bundle is designed for use with the 1756-RM, 1756-RM2/A, 1756RMXT, and 1756-RM2XT redundancy modules.
Upgrade the Firmware in the First Chassis
Complete these steps to upgrade the firmware in the first chassis.
1. Apply power to the chassis.
Logix5563
Redundancy Module
44490
2. Set the mode switch on the controller to REM.
Logix 55xx
RUN FORCE SD
68
OK
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
3. Wait for the redundancy module to complete its start-up scroll messages.
Check Module and status indicators. Wait 45 seconds before you begin
updating the 1756-RM firmware. During this time, the redundancy
module conducts internal operations to prepare for an update.
Power Supply
indicator is green.
Alphanumeric Display
Redundancy Module
CH2 CH1 OK
Logix5563
Redundancy Module
OK indicator is red during selftest, and turns green if
firmware is already
downloaded.
TIP
If it is a new module, wait until APPLICATION UPDATE
REQUIRED is displayed. The status indicator flashes red.
4. Launch ControlFLASH software and click Next to begin the update
process.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
69
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
5. Select the module’s catalog number (upgrade the redundancy module first)
and click Next.
IMPORTANT
The 1756-RM2/A module uses different firmware than the 1756-RM and 1756RMXT modules.
1756-RM/B
1756-RM2/A
6. Expand the network driver to locate the redundancy module or module
you are upgrading.
7. Select the module and click OK.
8. Select the firmware revision you want to update to and click Next.
9. Click Finish.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
10. Click Yes.
70
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
IMPORTANT
Chapter 3
This can take a few minutes. The system can look like it is not doing anything,
but it is.
When the update is complete, the Update Status dialog box appears and
indicates that the update has successfully completed.
11. Click OK.
12. Verify that the redundancy module status displays PRIM, indicating a
successful upgrade.
13. Complete steps 4…12 for each module in the chassis.
IMPORTANT Power off the first chassis after you have verified a successful
update of each module.
Upgrade the Firmware in the Second Chassis
Complete these steps to update the firmware for the modules in the second
chassis.
1. Apply power to the second chassis.
2. Complete steps 3…12 in section Upgrade the Firmware in the First Chassis
beginning on page 68 for the modules in the second chassis.
3. Power off the second chassis after you have verified the successful upgrade
of each module.
Step 5: Designate the
Primary and Secondary
Chassis
Power on the chassis you want to designate as the primary chassis first. After you
have applied power, qualify the system so that all module pairs are at compatible
firmware-revision levels.
IMPORTANT
Do not apply power to the chassis until you have read the instructions for
designating the primary chassis. Applying power to the chassis is crucial to
designating the primary and secondary chassis.
Do not attempt to designate a primary chassis before loading in an
application image.
Before you designate the primary chassis and qualify the system, make sure
you have the latest firmware installed.
See Step 4: Update Redundant Chassis Firmware on page 67.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
71
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Complete these steps to designate the primary and secondary chassis of a
redundant pair.
1. Verify that power is removed from both chassis.
2. Apply power to the chassis you want to designate as the primary chassis
and wait for the module’s status indicators to display PRIM.
3. Apply power to the chassis you want to designate as the secondary chassis.
4. Verify primary and secondary chassis designations by viewing the module
status display and the PRI indicator.
See Status Indicators on page 227 for specific redundancy module display
information.
IMPORTANT
72
If both modules have power applied to them simultaneously, the module with
the lowest IP address is designated as the primary chassis and displays PRIM on
the module’s four-character display. In addition, the PRI status indicator on the
primary redundancy module is green. The secondary chassis displays either
DISQ or SYNC, depending on the state of the secondary chassis. In addition, the
PRI status light on the secondary redundancy module is not illuminated.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
After Designation
When you first apply power to the designated primary and secondary chassis,
compatibility checks are carried-out between the redundant chassis. Then,
because the default Auto-Synchronization parameter is set at Always,
qualification begins.
TIP
While the qualification occurs, the module status display transitions from
DISQ (disqualified) to QFNG (qualifying) to SYNC (synchronized). The
qualification s completes in 1…3 minutes and then module status
display indicates the qualification status.
Use this table as a reference when interpreting the qualification status of the
modules displayed on the module status display.
.
Table 13 - Qualification Status Interpretation
Module Status Display
Interpretation
QFNG
Qualification processes are in progress.
SYNC
SYNC displays after qualification processes are complete.
This indicates that chassis configuration and the firmware revision levels are
compatible and that the secondary chassis is ready to assume control in the
event of a major fault in the primary chassis.
DISQ…QFNG…DISQ
If DISQ continues to display after about three minutes, one of these anomalies
exists:
• Incorrect chassis configuration. That is, incompatible hardware is used.
• Incompatible firmware revisions are used between the primary and
secondary modules.
• Keeper parameters between ControlNet module partners are not the
same.
• The partnered ControlNet modules are not set to the same node address.
• The Auto-Sychronization parameter within the Redundancy Module
Configuration Tool is set to Never.
Conversion from a Nonredundant to a Redundant System
You can upgrade the standalone chassis to a redundant chassis pair, by inserting a
redundancy module in the standalone chassis and setting up an identical chassis
with compatible modules (including the redundancy module) in the same slot as
the standalone chassis.
If the partnered chassis, containing nonredundant modules or nonredundancy
compliant firmware, is designated as the secondary chassis, it will stop
functioning.
For detail information, see Convert from a Nonredundant System on page 265.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
73
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Qualification Status via the RMCT
To view the qualification attempt, access the Synchronization or Synchronization
Status tabs of the RMCT. These tabs provide information about qualification
attempts and redundant chassis compatibility.
For more information about using the RMCT, see Chapter 6, Configure the
Redundancy Modules on page 105.
Figure 14 - RMCT Synchronization Status Tab
Figure 15 - Synchronization Status Tab for Chassis Compatibility
In addition, you can view events specific to qualification in the Event Log of the
RMCT.
Figure 16 - Event Log with Qualification Events
74
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 3
Reset the Redundancy Module
There are two ways to reset the module.
• Cycle power to the chassis
• Remove the module from the chassis and reinsert the module
IMPORTANT
Only choose to cycle power to the chassis if you will not lose control of your
process.
Remove or Replace the Redundancy Module
To remove or replace the redundancy module, follow these steps.
1. Push on upper and lower module tabs to disengage them.
2. Slide the module out of the chassis.
IMPORTANT
If you want to resume system operation with an identical module, you must
install the new module in the same slot.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
75
Chapter 3
Install the Enhanced Redundancy System
Notes:
76
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Requested Packet Interval
Topic
Page
Requested Packet Interval
77
Use IP Address Swapping
77
Use CIP Sync
81
Use Produce/Consume Connections
84
Configure EtherNet/IP Communication Modules in a Redundant System
85
Use An Enhanced Redundancy System in a Device-level Ring Topology
87
When using revisions earlier than 20.054, the RPI for I/O connections in a
redundancy-enabled controller tree must be less than or equal to 375 ms. When
using revision 20.054 or later, the RPI can be the same as a non-redundant
chassis.
CPU Usage
The System Resource Utilization table describes CPU usage for EtherNet/IP
communication modules.
Table 14 - System Resource Utilization Table
Use IP Address Swapping
If the CPU utilization
rate is
Then
0...80%
No action is required.
Important: This is the optimal rate.
Greater than 80%
• Take steps to reduce your CPU utilization. See the EtherNet/IP Network Configuration
user manual, publication ENET-UM001.
• Adjust your connection’s requested packet interval (RPI).
• Reduce the number of devices connected to your module.
Important: Your EtherNet/IP communication module can function at 100% CPU
capacity, but at or near this rate, you run the risk of CPU saturation and performance
problems.
IP address swapping is a feature available to EtherNet/IP communication
modules in an enhanced redundancy system where a partnered set of
EtherNet/IP communication modules swap IP addresses during a switchover.
IMPORTANT
You must use IP address swapping to use remote I/O and produce/consume
connections of an EtherNet/IP network.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
77
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Determine Use of IP Address Swapping
Depending on your EtherNet/IP network configuration, you can choose to use
IP address swapping between your partnered EtherNet/IP communication
modules in the event of a switchover.
If your partnered EtherNet/IP communication modules are on
the
Then
Same subnet
use IP address swapping
Different subnets
do not use IP address swapping
If you are using different subnets, you are responsible for programming your
system to use the address and subnet of the new primary chassis in the event of a
switchover.
Use IP Address Swapping
If you use IP address swapping, assign the same values for these configuration
parameters on both EtherNet/IP communication modules in the partnered set:
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Gateway address
This graphic shows a partnered set of EtherNet/IP communication modules
during initial configuration.
Figure 17 - EtherNet/IP Communication Modules’ IP Addresses During System Configuration
Assigned IP Address: 192.168.1.3
Primary chassis
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
78
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
CH2 CH1 OK
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Chapter 4
When an enhanced redundancy system begins operating, the primary
EtherNet/IP communication module uses the IP address assigned during initial
configuration. The secondary EtherNet/IP communication module
automatically changes its IP address to thenext highest value. When a switchover
occurs, the EtherNet/IP communication modules swap IP addresses.
For example, if you assign IP address 192.168.1.3 to both EtherNet/IP
communication modules in a partnered set, on initial system operation, the
secondary EtherNet/IP communication module automatically changes its IP
address to 192.168.1.4.
This graphic shows a partnered set of EtherNet/IP communication modules
after system operation begins.
Figure 18 - EtherNet/IP Communication Modules’ IP Addresses After System Operation Begins
IP Address: 192.168.1.3
Primary Chassis
IP Address: 192.168.1.4
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
TIP
CH2 CH1 OK
Do not assign IP addresses to EtherNet/IP communication modules outside the
partnered set to values that conflict with those used in the partnered set.
In the previous example, the partnered set uses 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.4.
Use 192.168.1.5 or higher for all EtherNet/IP communication modules outside
the partnered set.
This graphic shows the partnered set of EtherNet/IP communicationmodules in
RSLinx Classic software after system operation begins.
Figure 19 - IP Addresses in RSLinx Classic Software
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
79
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Static versus Dynamic IP Addresses
We recommend that you use static IP addresses on EtherNet/IP communication
modules in enhanced redundancy system.
ATTENTION: If you use dynamic IP addresses and a power outage, or other
network failure occurs, modules using dynamic IP addresses can be assigned
new addresses when the failure is resolved. If the IP addresses change, your
application could experience a loss of control or other serious complications
with your system.
You cannot use dynamic IP addresses with IP address swapping.
Reset the IP Address for an EtherNet/IP Communication Module
If necessary, you can reset a 1756-EN2x communication module’s IP address to
the factory default value. To return to the factory default, set the module’s rotary
switches to 888 and cycle power.
After cycling power to the EtherNet/IP communication module, you can either
set the module's switches to the desired address or set the switches to 999 and use
one of these methods to set the IP address:
• BOOTP-DHCP server
• RSLinx Classic communication software
• RSLogix 5000 programming software
80
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Use CIP Sync
Chapter 4
Beginning with enhanced redundancy system revision 19.052 or later, you can
use CIP Sync technology. CIP Sync technology provides a mechanism to
synchronize clocks between controllers, I/O devices, and other automation
products in your architecture with minimal user intervention.
CIP Sync technology uses Precision Time Protocol (PTP) to establish a Master/
Slave relationship among the clocks for each CIP Sync-enabled component in
the system. A single master clock, known as the Grandmaster, sets the clock to
which all other devices on the network synchronize their clocks.
IMPORTANT
Before you use this enhancement in an enhanced redundancy system, revision
19.050 or later, see these publications for a full understanding of CIP Sync
technology in any system:
• Integrated Architecture™ and CIP Sync Configuration Application
Technique, publication IA-AT003
• ControlLogix System User Manual, publication 1756-UM001
Consider these points when you use CIP Sync technology in an enhanced
redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later:
• If you enable CIP Sync Time Synchronization in the controllers in a
redundant chassis pair, you must also enable Time Synchronization in the
EtherNet/IP communication modules in the redundant chassis pair so all
devices have a single path to the Grandmaster.
If time synchronization is enabled in any controller in the primary chassis
of a disqualified redundant chassis pair, and no other devices in the
primary chassis have time synchronization enabled, the redundant chassis
pair attempts to qualify. However, in these application conditions, the
attempt to qualify fails.
• While CIP Sync technology can handle multiple paths between master
and slave clocks, it resolves mastership most effectively if you configure the
redundant paths so that Time Synchronization is enabled in only the
minimum required number of EtherNet/IP communication modules.
For example, if your redundant chassis pair has three 1756-EN2T
communication modules and all are connected to the same network,
enable Time Synchronization in only one of the modules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
81
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
• If the primary controller is the Grandmaster, the enhanced redundancy
system automatically manages the CIP Sync clock attributes so that the
controller in the primary chassis is always set to be the Grandmaster
instead of the secondary controller. This clock management ensures a
change to a new Grandmaster when the redundancy system switches over.
• When a switchover occurs, these events take place:
– The Grandmaster status transfers from the original primary controller
to the new primary controller. This transfer can take longer to
complete than if Grandmaster status was transferred between devices
in a nonredundant system.
– After the switchover is complete, system synchronization can take
longer in an enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later, that
uses CIP technology than one that does not.
• If you attempt to use the Redundant System Update (RSU) feature to
update an enhanced redundancy system, revision 16.081 or earlier, that
uses Coordinated System Time (CST), the enhanced redundancy system,
revision 19.052 or later, does not permit a locked switchover and the
update fails to complete.
To work around this restriction, first disable CST Mastership in the
original redundancy system and then use RSU to update to enhanced
redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later.
82
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Chapter 4
This figure shows an example enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052 or
later, using CIP Sync technology.
Use of ControlNet is not required when using CIP Sync technology in an
enhanced redundancy system. It is included in this figure for example purposes.
Figure 20 - Enhanced Redundancy System, Revision 19.052 or later, Using CIP Sync Technology
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
83
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Use Produce/Consume
Connections
Beginning with enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.053 or later, you can
use produce/consume connections over an EtherNet/IP network. Controllers
let you produce (broadcast) and consume (receive) system-shared tags.
TIP
When using 1756-L7x controllers in your system, you must use revision 19.053
or later.
Figure 21 - Example System Using Produced and Consumed Tags
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
Controller 1
Produced Tag
Controller 2
Consumed Tag
These requirements exist when you use produced and consumed connections
over an EtherNet/IP network in an enhanced redundancy system, revision
19.052 or later:
• You cannot bridge produced and consumed tags over two networks. For
two controllers to share produced or consumed tags, both must be
attached to the same network.
• Produced and consumed tags use connections in both the controllers and
the communication modules being used.
• Because the use of produced and consumed tags uses connections, the
number of connections available for other tasks, such as the exchange of
I/O data, is reduced.
The number of connections available in a system depends on controller
type and network communication modules used. Closely track the
number of produced and consumed connections to leave as many as
necessary for other system tasks.
• You must configure both connections, that is, the connection between the
primary controller and the remote controller, and the connection between
the remote controller and the primary controller, for Multicast. However,
if the redundancy system is the producer, it can be Unicast, because that is
configured in the remote controller, which is allowed.
84
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Configure EtherNet/IP
Communication Modules in a
Redundant System
Chapter 4
IMPORTANT
If controllers in the redundant chassis pair produce tags over an EtherNet/IP
network that controllers in remote chassis consume, the connection from the
remote controller to the redundant controller can briefly drop during a
switchover. This anomaly occurs if the EtherNet/IP communication modules in
the remote chassis do not use specific firmware revisions.
For the latest firmware revisions by product, go to GET SUPPORT NOW.
For more information on produced and consumed connections, see Logix5000
Controllers Produced and Consumed Tags user manual,
publication 1756-PM011.
IMPORTANT
Sockets are supported in the 1756-EN2T, 1756-EN2TR and 1756-EN2F modules,
firmware revision 5.008 or later. For additional information, see ENET-AT002.
IMPORTANT
Unicast functionality in enhanced redundancy systems supports produced
tags. Unicast consumed tags are not supported.
Use these procedures to configure EtherNet/IP communication modules used in
redundant chassis.
Before You Begin
Before you begin configuring the EtherNet/IP communication modules in the
redundant chassis, verify that these tasks have been completed:
• The redundancy modules are installed and connected in the redundant
chassis.
• A plan for IP address use has been executed:
– If you are using IP address swapping, plan for the use of two
consecutive IP addresses in the partnered set.
– If you are not using IP address swapping, plan for the use of two IP
addresses.
• Know the subnet mask and gateway address for the Ethernet network the
redundant modules are to operate on.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
85
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Options for Setting the IP Addresses of EtherNet/IP Communication
Modules
By default, ControlLogix EtherNet/IP communication modules ship with the IP
address set to 999 and with Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)/Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP)-enabled.
Use one of these tools to set the IP addresses for your EtherNet/IP
communication modules:
• Rotary switches on the module
• RSLinx Classic communication software
• RSLogix 5000 software
• BOOTP/DHCP utility - Provided with RSLogix 5000 software
Half/Full Duplex Settings
The enhanced redundancy system uses the duplex settings of the EtherNet/IP
communication module that is currently the primary. After a switchover, the
duplex settings of the new primary EtherNet/IP communication module are
used. By default, the duplex setting is automatic. We recommend that you use
this setting whenever possible.
To avoid communication errors, configure both the primary and secondary
EtherNet/IP communication modules with the same duplex settings. Using
different duplex settings on partnered EtherNet/IP communication modules
can result in messaging errors after a switchover.
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Use An Enhanced
Redundancy System in a
Device-level Ring Topology
Chapter 4
A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the
interconnection of automation devices. This topology is implemented at the
device level because the use of EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology embeds
switches into the end devices themselves. No additional switches are required.
This graphic shows an example DLR network that includes an enhanced
redundancy system, revision 19.052 or later, connected to the network.
Figure 22 - Example DLR Network
Products with embedded switch technology have these features in common:
• Support for the management of network traffic to be sure of timely
delivery of critical data
• Designed according to the ODVA specification for EtherNet/IP
networks
• Ring recovery time less than 3 ms for DLR networks of 50 or fewer nodes
• Support for CIP Sync technology
• Two ports to connect to DLR networks in a single subnet
Devices on a DLR network can function on the network in these required roles:
• Supervisor Nodes - There are two types of supervisor nodes:
1. Active Supervisor Node - The network requires one active supervisor node
per DLR network that executes these tasks:
– Verifies ring integrity
– Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault
– Collects ring diagnostic information
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
87
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
2. Back-up Supervisor Node - An optional node that behaves like a ring node
unless the active supervisor node cannot execute required tasks. At that
point, the back-up node becomes the active supervisor node.
• Ring Node - A node that processes data transmitted over the network or
passes the data to the next node on the network. When a fault occurs on
the DLR network, these nodes reconfigure themselves, relearn the
network topology, and can report fault locations to the active ring
supervisor.
We recommend that you configure at least one back-up supervisor node
on the DLR network.
During normal network operation, an active ring supervisor uses beacon, and
other DLR protocol frames to monitor network health. Back-up supervisor and
ring nodes monitor beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal and
Faulted states.
You can configure two beacon-related parameters:
• Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a
beacon frame through both of its ring ports.
• Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait
before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate
action.
IMPORTANT
88
Although these two parameters are configurable, the default values
accommodate most applications.
We strongly recommend that you use the default values.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Chapter 4
During normal operation, one of the active supervisor node’s network ports is
blocked for DLR protocol frames. However, the active supervisor node
continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network
health.
The graphic below shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring
supervisor.
Figure 23 - Normal DLR Network Operation
Active Ring
Supervisor
Blocked Port
Beacon Frame
Beacon Frame
Control Traffic
Control Traffic
Ring Node 1
Ring Node 2
Ring Node 3
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Ring Node 4
89
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
This graphic shows an example of an operating DLR network that includes an
enhanced redundancy system.
Figure 24 - Enhanced Redundancy System in a DLR Network
FactoryTalk Application
Cisco Switch
Stratix 8000™ Switches
Redundant Chassis Pair
HMI Connected via
1783-ETAP Taps
Remote ControlLogix Chassis with Redundant Power
Supplies and I/O Modules
90
1715 Redundant I/O System
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
Chapter 4
Complete these steps to construct and configure the example DLR network.
1. Install and connect devices on the DLR network but leave at least one
connection open.
IMPORTANT
When you initially install and connect devices on the DLR network,
leave at least one connection open, that is, temporarily omit the
physical connection between two nodes on the DLR network.
You must configure an active supervisor node for the network before
network operation begins when the final connection is made.
If you fully connect your DLR network without a supervisor configured,
a network storm can result, rendering the network unusable until one
link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled.
This graphic shows the DLR network with one connection left open.
Figure 25 - DLR Topology with One Connection Unmade
FactoryTalk Application
Cisco Switch
Stratix 8000 Switches
Redundant Chassis Pair
HMI Connected via
1783-ETAP Taps
Physical
connection is not
made yet.
Remote ControlLogix Chassis with Redundant Power
Supplies and I/O Modules
1715 Redundant I/O System
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
91
Chapter 4
Configure the EtherNet/IP Network
2. Configure and enable one active supervisor and any back-up nodes on the
network.
Use either of these tools to configure and enable supervisor nodes on a
DLR network:
• RSLogix 5000 programming software
• RSLinx Classic communication software
3. Complete the physical connections on the network to establish a complete
and fully functioning DLR network. This figure shows the example DLR
network on page 91 with all physical connections complete.
Figure 26 - Fully Connected DLR Network
FactoryTalk Application
Cisco Switch
Stratix 8000 Switches
Redundant Chassis Pair
HMI Connected via
1783-ETAP Taps
Physical
connection is
made.
Remote ControlLogix Chassis with Redundant Power
Supplies and I/O Modules
1715 Redundant I/O System
4. Verify supervisor configuration and overall DLR network status with
either of these tools:
• RSLogix 5000 software
• RSLinx Classic communication software
92
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
5
Configure the ControlNet Network
Produce/Consume
Connections
Topic
Page
Produce/Consume Connections
93
Network Update Time
95
Use a Scheduled or Unscheduled Network
97
Schedule a New Network
98
Update an Existing Scheduled Network
100
Check the Network Keeper States
101
You can use produce/consume connections over a ControlNet network.
Controllers let you produce (broadcast) and consume (receive) system-shared
tags.
Figure 27 - Example System Using Produced and Consumed Tags
Primary chassis
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
Controller 1
Produced Tag
Controller 2
Consumed Tag
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
93
Chapter 5
Configure the ControlNet Network
Keep these points in mind when you use produced and consumed connections
over a ControlNet network in an enhanced redundancy system:
• During a switchover, the connection for tags that are consumed from a
redundant controller can drop briefly.
– The data does not update.
– The logic acts on the last data that it received.
After the switchover, the connection is reestablished and the data begins to
update again.
• You cannot bridge produced and consumed tags over two networks. For
two controllers to share produced or consumed tags, both must be
attached to the same network.
• Produced and consumed tags use connections in both the controllers and
the communication modules being used.
• Because the use of produced and consumed tags uses connections, the
number of connections available for other tasks, such as the exchange of
I/O data, is reduced.
The number of connections available in a system depends on controller
type and network communication modules used. Closely track the
number of produced and consumed connections to leave as many as
necessary for other system tasks.
94
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the ControlNet Network
Network Update Time
Chapter 5
The network update time (NUT) that you specify for your redundant system
impacts your system performance and your switchover response time. Typical
NUTs used with redundant systems range from 5…10 ms.
NUTs with Multiple ControlNet Networks
You can choose to use multiple ControlNet networks with your enhanced
redundancy system.
Figure 28 - Example of Two ControlNet Networks
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
ControlNet Network 1
NUT = 5 ms
ControlNet Network 2
NUT =  21 ms
When you use multiple ControlNet networks, the networks must use compatible
NUTs. Compatible NUTs are determined based on the network that uses the
smallest NUT.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
95
Chapter 5
Configure the ControlNet Network
Use this table to determine the compatible NUTs for your system.
Table 15 - Compatible NUT Values for Multiple ControlNet Networks
96
If the smallest NUT of a
network is (ms)
Then the largest NUT of any other network must be less
than or equal to (ms)
2
15
3
17
4
19
5
21
6
23
7
25
8
27
9
29
10
31
11
33
12
35
13
37
14
39
15
41
16
43
17
46
18
48
19
50
20
52
21
55
22
57
23
59
24
62
25
64
26
66
27
68
28
71
29
73
30
75
31
78
32
80
33
82
34
84
35
87
36
89
37...90
90
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the ControlNet Network
Use a Scheduled or
Unscheduled Network
Chapter 5
It is up to the user to decided between using a scheduled or unscheduled
network.
Use a Scheduled Network
Schedule or reschedule your ControlNet network when you are executing
these tasks:
• Commissioning a new redundant system.
• Adding a new chassis of remote ControlLogix I/O that is set to use the
Rack Optimized communication format.
• Adding any remote I/O besides ControlLogix I/O. For example, if adding
FLEX I/O modules, you must schedule the network.
• Using produced/consumed data. Any time you add a produced/consumed
data tag, you must reschedule the ControlNet network.
To schedule or reschedule your ControlNet network, you put your redundant
system in Program mode.
Use an Unscheduled Network
You can use an unscheduled network when you are doing the following:
• Adding a new remote I/O chassis of ControlLogix I/O that does not use
the Rack Optimized communication format. That is, direct connections
to the I/O are used.
• Adding a ControlLogix I/O module to a chassis that has already been
scheduled and uses the Rack Optimized communication format.
• Adding some drives that support adding I/O while online.
• Using ControlNet to monitor HMI or the controller program.
You can add those components to the unscheduled network while your
redundant system is online and in Run mode. We recommend that you do not
use an unscheduled network for all of your I/O connections.
The use of 1756-CN2/B, 1756-CN2R/B, and 1756-CN2RXT modules
provides increased capacity for adding I/O while online compared to 1756-CNB
or 1756-CNBR modules. With this increased capacity, you can easily add I/O
and increase ControlNet connections used without affecting your redundant
system performance.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
97
Chapter 5
Configure the ControlNet Network
Add Remote ControlNet Modules While Online
If you are adding a remote I/O chassis comprised of a ControlLogix ControlNet
module and ControlLogix I/O while your redundant system is running (online),
make these considerations:
• Do not use Rack Optimized communication formats. The ControlNet
module and I/O must be configured for direct connections.
• For each remote I/O module used, plan for one direct connection to be
used.
Schedule a New Network
Complete these steps to schedule a new ControlNet network for an enhanced
redundancy system.
IMPORTANT
Before you schedule a ControlNet network, turn on the power to both
redundant chassis.
If you schedule a ControlNet network while the secondary chassis is off, the
keeper signature of a 1756-CN2/B or 1756-CN2R/B module may not match
its partner, and the secondary chassis will fail to synchronize.
1. Turn on the power to each chassis.
2. Start RSNetWorx for ControlNet software.
3. From the File menu, choose New.
4. From the Network menu, choose Online.
5. Select your ControlNet network and click OK.
6. Check Edits Enabled.
7. From the Network menu, choose Properties.
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the ControlNet Network
Chapter 5
8. In the Network Parameters tab, enter the parameters that are appropriate
for your system.
Parameter
Specify
Network Update Time (ms)
The minimum repetitive interval when data is sent over the ControlNet
network.
Max Scheduled Address
The highest node number that uses scheduled communication on the
network.
Max Unscheduled Address
The highest node number that you use on the network.
Media Redundancy
The ControlNet channels you are using.
Network Name
A name for identifying the ControlNet network.
9. Click OK.
10. From the Network menu, choose Single Pass Browse.
11. From the File menu, choose Save.
12. Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration, then
click Save.
13. Click Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections (default) and
click OK.
You have finished scheduling your new ControlNet network.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
99
Chapter 5
Configure the ControlNet Network
Update an Existing
Scheduled Network
If you are adding the redundant chassis to an existing ControlLogix system that
uses a ControlNet network, complete these steps to update the existing
ControlNet network.
1. Turn on the power to each chassis.
2. Start RSNetWorx for ControlNet software.
3. From the File menu, choose Open.
4. Select the file for the network and click Open.
5. From the Network menu, choose Online.
6. Click Edits Enabled.
7. From the Network menu, choose Properties.
8. In the Network Parameters tab, update the parameters specific to your
system.
9. Click OK.
10. From the Network menu, choose Single Pass Browse.
11. From the File menu, choose Save.
12. Click Optimize and re-write schedule for all connections and click OK.
13. Click OK.
You have completed updating your scheduled ControlNet network.
100
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the ControlNet Network
Check the Network Keeper
States
Chapter 5
After you schedule your ControlNet network, check the states of keeper-capable
nodes. Checking the status of keeper-capable nodes is important because if a
major network disruption occurs, the keepers provide network configuration
parameters required to recover.
For more information about keepers and their function in a ControlNet
network, see the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User
Manual, publication CNET-UM001.
To check the status of keepers on the ControlNet network, complete these steps.
1. In RSNetWorx for ControlNet software, from the Network menu choose
Keeper Status.
2. Verify that one keeper-capable device outside the redundant chassis is
indicated as active and valid.
3. Verify that all of the keeper-capable devices on the network are valid.
Active and valid keeper
device.
Keeper-capable devices are valid.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
101
Chapter 5
Configure the ControlNet Network
4. Verify that all of the nodes on the network have the same keeper signature.
Keeper signatures are all
the same.
TIP
If the keeper signatures of partnered ControlNet modules are different, your
redundant chassis may not synchronize.
If the keeper signatures of your partnered ControlNet modules are different,
update the keepers of the redundant ControlNet modules.
Save the Project for Each Primary Controller
After you have scheduled your ControlNet networks, go online with each
controller in your primary chassis and save the project. This makes downloading a
project easier in the future because you won’t be required to reschedule the
network after completing the download.
Automatic Keeper Crossloads
The 1756-CN2/B, 1756-CN2R/B, and 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet modules
have an Automatic Keeper Crossload feature that makes replacing a ControlNet
module in a redundant chassis easier. The Automatic Keeper Crossload feature
also reduces the need to use RSNetWorx for ControlNet software once the
system is running.
With the Automatic Keeper Crossload feature, ControlNet modules can
automatically upload the keeper signature and network parameters from the
active keeper of a ControlNet network.
102
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the ControlNet Network
Chapter 5
To replace a ControlNet module that has been configured and scheduled on the
ControlNet network, remove the existing module and insert a 1756-CN2/B,
1756-CN2R/B, or 1756-CN2RXT module. The module you are inserting must
be unconfigured or have a keeper signature of all zeros.
TIP
To clear the keeper signature of a 1756-CN2, 1756-CN2R, or 1756-CN2RXT
module, complete these steps.
1.Disconnect the module from the ControlNet network and remove it from the
chassis.
2.Set the node address switches to 00.
3.Insert the module back into the chassis and wait for the status display to indicate
Reset Complete.
4.Remove the module and set the node address switches to the intended node
address.
5.Insert the module into the chassis.
After being inserted and connected to the ControlNet network, the
unconfigured 1756-CN2, 1756-CN2R, and 1756-CN2RXT modules crossload
the appropriate configuration from the active keeper on the ControlNet network
and become configured with the appropriate keeper signature.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
103
Chapter 5
Configure the ControlNet Network
Notes:
104
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
About the Redundancy
Module Configuration Tool
(RMCT)
Topic
Page
About the Redundancy Module Configuration Tool (RMCT)
105
Determine if Further Configuration is Required
106
Use the RMCT
107
Module Info Tab
111
Configuration Tab
113
Synchronization Tab
116
Synchronization Status Tab
119
Event Log Tab
120
System Update Tab
130
System Event History
136
Using Dual Fiber Ports with the 1756-RM2/A Redundancy Module
138
The Redundancy Module Configuration Tool (RMCT) is used to configure the
redundancy modules and to determine the status of the redundancy system.
Use the RMCT to complete these configuration-related tasks:
• Set Auto-Synchronization parameters.
• Set the time and date of redundancy modules.
• View and set module information.
• View and set Chassis ID parameters (Chassis A, Chassis B).
• Lock the redundant system for an update.
• Conduct a test switchover.
You can also use this functionality available with the RMCT to determine the
redundant system’s status:
• View error diagnostics specific to redundant chassis.
• View partnered modules’ qualification and compatibility status.
• Identify noncompliant modules for removal.
• View redundant system event history.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
105
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
The chassis platform configuration identifies the common operating platform of
the modules in the redundant chassis and applies to all redundancy modules. It
may be one of the following values depending on the redundancy release installed
in the system and the type of communication modules running in the redundant
chassis.
Table 16 - Chassis Platform Configuration
Determine if Further
Configuration is Required
Type
Description
Standard
The redundant chassis is operating on a Standard
platform. Modules supported in redundancy release
revisions 16.057, 16.056, 16.053, and 16.050 and releases
earlier than revision 16 comprise the standard platform.
Enhanced
The redundant chassis is operating on an Enhanced
platform. Modules supported in redundancy release
revision 16.054 and all releases of revision 16.080 and
later comprise the enhanced platform.
Hybrid
The redundant chassis contains a mix of modules
belonging to standard and enhanced platforms. All Hybrid
platforms are an unsupported redundant system
configuration.
The default configuration of the redundancy modules lets you synchronize your
redundant chassis without additional configuration if you are using a basic
redundant chassis pair.
However, some applications and uses of the redundancy system can require
additional configuration. For example, you must use the RMCT for additional
configuration if you need to complete any of these tasks:
• Set the redundancy modules to a different time or date (recommended).
• Program your controller to control the redundant system.
• Change the redundancy synchronization options of the redundant system.
• Change the synchronization states of your redundant chassis.
• Conduct a test switchover.
• Complete a firmware update of a module in the redundant chassis while
the system is online.
If you need to complete any of these tasks, reference the sections that follow.
106
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Use the RMCT
Chapter 6
To access and begin using the RMCT, launch RSLinx Classic software and
browse to your redundancy module. Right-click the redundancy module and
choose Module Configuration.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
107
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
When you access the RMCT, the dialog box always indicates the status of the
redundancy chassis in the bottom-left corner.
108
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Identify the RMCT Version
You must use a version of the RMCT that is compatible with your redundancy
module firmware.
Beginning with version 20.054, the redundancy module firmware reports back to
the Redundancy Module Configuration Tool (RMCT) as to which version of
the RMCT is compatible. In the case of an incompatibility, the RMCT will show
only the Module Info tab and indicate the version that the firmware is compatible
with.
If using a version earlier than 20.054, go to the Tech Support website at http://
www.rockwellautomation/support.com.to determine which RMCT version is
required for use with your redundancy module firmware revision.
To find the latest firmware bundle on the website, follow these steps.
1. Once on the site, choose Control Hardware.
2. On the Firmware Updates page, choose the latest firmware bundle.
3. Download if different from your current module’s firmware.
Complete these steps to check or verify the version of the Redundancy Module
Configuration Tool (RMCT) that you have installed.
TIP
The RMCT launches at the version that is compatible with the 1756
redundancy module firmware that is currently installed.
If you have not updated your 1756 redundancy module firmware after
upgrading your RMCT version, the RMCT version that is indicated may not
reflect the version you updated to. You can also check the RMCT version that
you have installed by using Add or Remove Programs in the Control Panel.
1. Launch RSLinx Classic software.
2. Click the RSWho icon.
3. Right-click your redundancy module and choose Module Configuration.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
109
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
The Module Configuration dialog box opens.
4. Right-click the title bar and choose About.
The About dialog box opens and indicates the RMCT version.
Update the RMCT Version
The RMCT version that is compatible with your redundancy module firmware is
packaged with the redundancy system firmware bundle. To launch the
installation of the RMCT, open the folder that contains the redundancy
firmware revision and double-click the executable file titled
Redundancy_Module_CT.exe.
The RMCT Installation Wizard opens and prompts you with the steps required
to install the RMCT.
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Module Info Tab
Chapter 6
The Module Info tab of the RMCT provides a general overview of the
redundancy module’s identification and status information. This status
information is updated approximately once every two seconds.
NOTE: Not all indicators are shown for 1756-RM/A and 1756-RM/B modules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
111
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
These parameters are indicated in the Module Info tab.
Table 17 - Module Info Tab - Parameters Indicated
Parameter
Description
Vendor
Name of the redundancy module’s vendor.
Product Type
General product type of the redundancy module.
Product Code
CIP product code for the redundancy module.
Revision
Major and minor revision information for the redundancy module.
Redundancy Module Serial
Number
Serial number of the redundancy module.
Product Name
Predefined catalog name of the redundancy module.
General Status
General state of the redundancy module. Possible values include Startup, Load, Fault,
and OK.
Major Fault
Redundancy module’s major fault status. When a major fault is detected, the system
does not provide redundancy support.
Minor Fault
Redundancy module’s minor fault status. When a minor fault is detected the system
continues to provide redundancy support.
Error Code
Error code related to the fault if one exists.
Error Message
Text-based message describing the error if a fault exists.
Recovery Message
Text-based message that indicates the recovery from a fault.
Total
Indicates the number of channel switchovers that have occurred from CH1 to CH2 and
vice versa on the module since its last powerup. It is reset to 0 automatically by
firmware on a power cycle.
Periodic
Indicates the number of switchovers that have occurred between CH1 and CH2 over
the last 10-second interval. The counter is constantly updated to reflect the value
recorded at every 10-second interval. The counter is automatically reset to 0 on a
power cycle.
Max Periodic Switchovers
The maximum number recorded in the Periodic counter. The time of the update is
recorded every time the counter is updated. The counter is automatically reset to 0 on
a power cycle and may also be reset by clicking the Reset button.(1)
CH1 Status
Fiber Channel 1 status.
The status shows the operating condition of the respective fiber channels in terms of
one of the following values:
– Unknown - Operating state is not yet determined
– Active - Channel is operating normally as the ACTIVE channel
– Redundant - Channel is operating normally as the REDUNDANT channel
– Link Down - Channel is disconnected. Causes can be: the cable is
disconnected/broken/damaged; signal is attenuated, connector is loose, the
partner 1756-RM2 module is power down or in a major fault state
– No SFP - No transceiver was detected, it has failed, it is loosely connected, it is
not installed
– SFP !Cpt - Transceiver is not a Rockwell Automation supported unit
– SFP Fail - Transceiver is in a failed state
CH2 Status
Fiber Channel 2 status. Refer to CH1 Status on page 112.
Chassis Platform Configuration Indicates whether configuration is enhanced or standard (version 19.05x and above
always displays ‘enhanced’).
(1) The Periodic counters can be used to identify a burst of switchovers that may take place due to intermittent channel failures within
a few seconds. The recorded time may be helpful to correlate the switchover occurrences with any external failures that may have
occurred on the fiber cables.
In addition, you can click Change to edit the User-Defined Identity parameters
to meet your application needs.
112
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Configuration Tab
Chapter 6
Use the Configuration tab to set redundancy options and the module’s internal
clock. After you modify a parameter, the Apply Workstation Time button
becomes active.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
113
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Auto-Synchronization
The first parameter in the Configuration tab is the Auto-Synchronization
parameter. The value you set this parameter to determines a significant part of
your redundant system behavior.
TIP
Verify that your Auto-Synchronization parameter is at the proper value
before you make any changes to your redundant system. This helps
prevent system errors.
For example, if you are upgrading your redundant system firmware, verify
that this parameter is set to Never or Conditional before disqualifying your
secondary chassis. If this parameter is Always, you cannot properly
disqualify your chassis and conduct the update.
Use this table to determine the Auto-Synchronization setting that best suits your
application.
114
If you use this parameter
Then this synchronization behavior results
Never
The system remains in the same state, that is, either synchronized or
disqualified, until one of these events takes place:
• A command is issued from the RMCT to either synchronize or disqualify.
• The controller commands synchronization or disqualification through the
use of a MSG instruction. For this to occur, Enable User Program Control
must be checked.
• A fault on the primary causes a switchover.
Always
The system automatically synchronizes on a regular basis.
If you attempt to disqualify the system by using the Disqualify Secondary
command in the RMCT, the resulting disqualification is temporary as the
system automatically qualifies and synchronizes again.
If the controller program disqualifies the system, the resulting disqualification
is also temporary.
Conditional
The system behavior with this setting is dependent on the AutoSynchronization state of your system, found in the lower left portion of the
RMCT window after setting the Auto-Synchronization parameter to
Conditional:
• If your Auto-Synchronization parameter is set to Conditional and your
Auto-Synchronization state is 'Conditional, Enabled', then the system
continually attempts to synchronize.
• If your Auto-Synchronization parameter is set to Conditional and your
Auto-Synchronization state is 'Conditional, Disabled', then the system does
not automatically attempt to synchronize.
To change from 'Conditional, Enabled' to 'Conditional, Disabled', click
Disqualify Secondary on the Synchronization tab.
To change from 'Conditional, Disabled' to 'Conditional, Enabled', click
Synchronize Secondary on the Synchronization tab.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Chassis ID
The chassis ID parameter is used to assign a generic label to the chassis that house
the redundancy modules. The available chassis labels are Chassis A and Chassis B.
If you change the chassis label in the RMCT of the primary redundancy module,
the secondary module and chassis are automatically assigned the other chassis
label.
The chassis label assigned to the module remains associated with the same
physical chassis, regardless of its primary or secondary control designation.
Enable User Program Control
If you plan to use MSG instructions in your controller program to initiate a
switchover, change the redundancy module time, or conduct synchronization,
then you must check Enable User Program Control in the Configuration tab.
If you leave Enable User Program Control unchecked, the redundancy modules
do not accept any commands from the controller.
Redundancy Module Date and Time
The Redundancy Module Date and Time parameters can be applied separate
from the Redundancy Module Options parameters. The time specified with
these parameters is the time referenced by the event logs when a redundant
system event occurs.
To make changes to the redundancy module time settings, use the pull-down
menu or type your changes then click Set to implement time changes. Or, to set
the redundancy module’s time to match that of the workstation, click Apply
Workstation Time.
IMPORTANT
We recommend that you set the redundancy module date and time when you
commission a system. We also recommend that you periodically check the date
and time settings to make sure they match those of the controller.
If a power failure occurs on the redundant chassis, you must reset the date and
time information of the redundancy modules. The modules do not retain those
parameters when power is lost.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
115
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Synchronization Tab
The Synchronization Tab provides commands for these options:
• Changing the synchronization state of the system (synchronize or
disqualify)
• Initiating a switchover
• Forcing the disqualified secondary to become the primary
The commands available are described in the Commands in the Synchronization
Tab section on page 117.
This tab also provides information about the last four synchronization attempts
in the Recent Synchronization Attempts log. Attempts are identified by N or NX. If the redundant chassis fail to synchronize, a cause is identified in the Recent
Synchronization Attempts log.
The causes and their interpretations are described in the Recent Synchronization
Attempts Log section on page 118.
116
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Commands in the Synchronization Tab
These sections explain each redundancy command and the system conditions
that are required for the command to be available.
Command
Description
Synchronize Secondary
This command forces the primary redundancy module to attempt synchronization with its partner. This command is
available in specific conditions:
• Available only when the chassis redundancy state is as follows:
– Primary with Disqualified Secondary
– Disqualified Secondary
• Unavailable (dimmed) in all other chassis states
Synchronization is asynchronous with the execution of this command. Successful execution of this command begins with
synchronization, which can take several minutes. Monitor the chassis status displayed at the bottom of the RMCT to
determine when synchronization has completed.
Disqualify Secondary
This command forces the primary redundancy module to disqualify its partner.
ATTENTION:
•
•
Disqualifying the secondary chassis makes it unable to assume control functions, that is,
redundancy is lost.
If you disqualify the secondary and a major fault occurs on the remaining primary, a switchover
does not occur.
This command is available in specific conditions:
• Available only when the chassis redundancy state is as follows:
– Primary with Synchronized Secondary
– Synchronized Secondary
• Unavailable (dimmed) in all other chassis states
If you use the Disqualify Secondary command when the Auto-Synchronization parameter is set to Always, a
synchronization attempt occurs immediately after the secondary chassis becomes disqualified.
To keep the secondary disqualified after issuing a Disqualify Secondary command, set the Auto-Synchronization
parameter to Conditional or Never before disqualifying the secondary.
Initiate Switchover
This command forces the system to initiate an immediate switchover from the primary chassis to the secondary chassis.
This command can be used when upgrading redundancy system firmware or when completing maintenance on one
chassis of the redundant pair.
This command can also be used to perform a realistic test of your redundant system behavior by simulating a failure
detected in the primary control chassis.
This command is available in specific conditions:
• Available only when the chassis redundancy state is as follows:
– Primary with Synchronized Secondary
– Synchronized Secondary
• Unavailable (dimmed) in all other chassis states
Become Primary
This command forces a disqualified secondary system to become a primary system and is available in specific conditions:
• Available only when the chassis redundancy state is Secondary with No Primary.
• Unavailable (dimmed) in all other chassis states
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
117
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Recent Synchronization Attempts Log
This table describes the possible result and causes of synchronization states.
Table 18 - Recent Synchronization Attempts Log - Result Interpretations
Result
Result Interpretation
Undefined
The result of the synchronization is unknown.
No attempt since last powerup
Synchronization has not been attempted since power was applied to
the module.
Success
Full synchronization was successfully completed.
Abort
The synchronization attempt failed. See the table Recent
Synchronization Attempts Log - Result Interpretations for further
information.
If the Synchronization Attempts log indicates that the Synchronization attempt
was aborted, use this table to further interpret the cause.
Table 19 - Synchronization Interpretation
Cause
Cause Interpretation
Undefined
The cause of synchronization failure is unknown.
Module Pair Incompatible
Synchronization aborted because one or more module pairs are incompatible.
Module Configuration Error
Synchronization aborted because one of the modules is improperly configured.
Edit Session In Progress
Synchronization aborted because an edit or session is in progress.
Crossloading Failure
An undetermined failure occurred during synchronization between redundancy modules.
Comm Disconnected
The cable between the redundancy modules was disconnected.
Module Insertion
Synchronization aborted because a module was inserted into a chassis.
Module Removal
Synchronization aborted because a module was removed from a chassis.
Secondary Module Failed
Synchronization aborted because of a failure in the secondary module.
Incorrect Chassis State
Synchronization aborted due to an incorrect chassis state.
Comm Does Not Exist
Synchronization could not be performed because the communication link between redundancy modules does not exist.
Nonredundant Compliant Module Exists
Synchronization could not be performed because one or more nonredundancy modules are present in one of the chassis.
Sec Failed Module Exists
A module in the secondary chassis has asserted the SYS_FAIL line, indicating that it has faulted or failed.
Local Major Unrecoverable Fault
Synchronization was aborted because of a local major unrecoverable fault.
Partner Has Major Fault
Synchronization was aborted because the partner module has a major fault.
Sec SYS_FAIL_L Subsystem Failed
The test of the SYS_FAIL line in the secondary chassis failed.
Sec RM Device Status = Comm Error
Synchronization was aborted because the secondary redundancy module’s status indicates a communication error.
Sec RM Device Status = Major Recoverable
Fault
Synchronization was aborted because the secondary redundancy module’s status indicates a major recoverable fault.
Sec RM Device Status = Major Unrecoverable
Fault
Synchronization was aborted because the secondary redundancy module’s status indicates a major unrecoverable fault.
Incorrect Device State
Synchronization was aborted because the device is in the wrong state.
Primary Module Failed
Synchronization was aborted because of a failure in the primary module.
Primary Failed Module Exists
A module in the primary chassis has asserted the SYS_FAIL line, indicating that it has faulted or failed.
Auto-Sync Option
Synchronization was aborted because the Auto-Synchronization parameter of one of the redundancy modules was changed during
synchronization.
118
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Table 19 - Synchronization Interpretation
Cause
Cause Interpretation
Module Qual Request
Synchronization was aborted because another synchronization request was received. The current synchronization has stopped so that
the new synchronization request can be serviced.
SYS_FAIL_L Deasserted
Synchronization was aborted because one of the modules came out of a faulted or failed state.
Disqualify Command
Synchronization was aborted because the redundancy module received a disqualify command from another device. The originating
device sends this command when it is no longer capable of performing in the qualified state.
Disqualify Request
Synchronization was aborted because the redundancy module received a disqualify command from another device. The originating
device sends this command when it is no longer capable of performing in the qualified state.
Platform Configuration Identity Mismatch
Detected
There are modules in the primary or secondary chassis that do not belong to the enhanced platform.
Application Requires Enhanced Platform
A redundant controller is running an application that contains a feature qualified to run only on an enhanced redundant platform, for
example, Alarms.
ICPT Asserted
A test line on the backplane is asserted.
Unicast Not Supported
A unicast connection is configured in the redundant controller, and enhanced redundancy systems do not support Unicast.
PTP Configuration Error
A redundant controller's PTP clock is not synchronized or the partner controller pair is synchronized to a different grandmaster.
Secured Module Mismatch
A mismatch was detected between a primary and secondary secured module.
Synchronization Status Tab
The Synchronization Status tab provides a module-level view of these items:
• Synchronization state (for example, Synchronized or Disqualified)
• Chassis designation (Primary or Secondary)
• Module compatibility with its partner (for example, Full or Undefined)
Each module installed in the chassis is identified and information regarding its
partner and compatibility are provided.
Synchronization State
Chassis Designation
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Module-partner Compatibility
119
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Event Log Tab
The Event Log tab provides a history of events that have occurred on the
redundant chassis.
These system events are indicated in the event logs:
• Qualification stages entered and completed
• Module insertion/removal
• Firmware errors
• Communication events and errors
• Configuration changes
• Other system events that affect qualification and synchronization
IMPORTANT
The events logged in this tab are not always indicative of an error. Many of
the events logged are informational only.
To determine if additional action or troubleshooting is required in response
to an event, see the Event Classifications table on page 121.
The Event Log tab can be customized to view the log specific to only one chassis
or the event logs of both redundant chassis. You can alter your view of the event
logs by changing the Auto-Update and Partner Log parameters.
Table 20 - Settings for Event Log Views
Use this setting
To
Auto-Update
Keep the log from updating while you’re viewing it.
Partner Log
View only the event log for the module you are accessing.
Figure 29 - Settings for Event Log Views
Check On to keep the log updating automatically.
120
Check Close to view only the log of one redundancy module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Event Classifications
Each event identified and logged is classified. You can use these classifications to
identify the severity of the event and determine if additional action is required.
Figure 30 - Event Classifications in the Event Log Tab
Event Classifications
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
121
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Use this table to determine what an event classification indicates and if corrective
action is required.
Table 21 - Classification Types
Classification Type
Description
Action Required
Configuration
A redundancy module configuration parameter has been changed.
For example, if you change the Auto-Synchronization parameter from
Always to Never, an event classified as Configuration is logged.
No corrective action is required.
This event is provided for informational purposes and does not indicate
serious anomaly with the redundancy system.
Command
An event related to commands issued to the redundant system has
occurred.
For example, if you change the Redundancy Module Date and Time
parameters, a WCT time change event of the Command classification is
logged.
No corrective action is required.
This event is provided for informational purposes and does not indicate
serious anomaly with the redundancy system.
Failure
A failure on the redundancy module has occurred.
For example, an internal Firmware error event classified as a Failure can
be indicated in the event log.
Action can be required to determine the cause of the failure.
If the failure is not followed by a Switchover or Major Fault event, then the
module could have corrected the error internally and additional action is
not required.
To determine if corrective action is required, double-click the event to see
Extended Event Information and the suggested recovery method, if
applicable.
Major Fault
A major fault has occurred on one of the redundancy modules.
Action can be required to determine the action needed to correct the fault.
Double-click the event to see Extended Event Information and the
suggested recovery method, if applicable.
Minor Fault
A minor fault has occurred on one of the redundancy modules.
No corrective action is required.
This event is provided for informational purposes and does not indicates
serious anomaly with the redundancy system.
Starts/Stops
Various internal chassis and module processes have started or stopped.
No corrective action is required.
However, if an event that is classified as a Failure, State Change, or Major
Fault occurs after the Starts/Stops event, view the Extended Event
Information of both events to determine if the events are related.
State Changes
A chassis or module state change has occurred.
For example, if the chassis designation changes from being a
disqualified secondary to a qualified secondary, a State Change event is
logged.
No corrective action is required.
However, if an event that is classified as a Failure, or Major Fault occurs after
the State Changes event, view the Extended Event Information of both
events to determine if the events are related.
Switchover
An event related to a chassis switchover has occurred.
For example, if an Initiate Switchover command is issued, an event
classified as Switchover is logged.
Action can be required to determine the cause of the switchover and
potential correction methods.
Double-click the event to see Extended Event Information and the
suggested recovery method, if applicable.
Synchronization
An event related to chassis synchronization has occurred.
For example, if the Synchronization command has been issued, a
Network Transitioned to Attached event is logged and classified as
Synchronization.
No corrective action is required.
This event is provided for informational purposes and does not indicates
serious anomaly with the redundancy system.
122
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Access Extended Information About an Event
Events logged in the Event Log tab can have additional information available. To
access additional information about an event, double-click an event listed in the
log.
Double-click to open extended information.
Scroll to view details
of other events.
View the Description
and Extended Data
Definitions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
123
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Interpret an Event’s Extended Information
The information listed in this table can be provided (depending on the type of
event) after you have accessed the Extended Information Definition dialog box.
Information Type
Description
Event Information
The enhanced redundancy system assigns this event information:
• Event number
• Date and time the event occurred
• Event classification
Submitter Information
This information reflects information specific to the module that reported the
event. Information provided in this section includes the:
• Name of the module that originated the event
• Slot number of the module that originated the event
• Serial number of the module that originated the event
Event Details
This section provides these additional details about the event:
• Description of the event
• Examine the Extended Data Definition, which provides an explanation of the
event and bytes, for errors
• Extended Data Bytes (in Hexadecimal) that provides further details the event
Export Event Log Data
After you have viewed extended information about an event, you could need to
export event data. You can export data with either of these features:
• Export Selection
• Export All - Available with enhanced redundancy system, Revision 19.052
or later
Export Selection
Use this feature to export event log data for a single or multiple event that occurs
on a primary or secondary redundancy module.
Complete these steps to export event data for a single event.
TIP
If the redundancy modules are not available in RSLinx Classic software after
a fault, you must apply the recovery method indicated by the module
before attempting to export the Event Log data.
1. Launch RSLinx Classic communication software and browse to the
redundancy modules.
2. Right-click the primary redundancy module and choose
Module Configuration.
124
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
3. In the Auto-Update area, click Off to keep the log from updating.
4. In the Partner Log area, click Close.
This closes the event log of the partner module.
5. Select a single event or multiple events for which you want to export data.
To select multiple events, select a start event, press SHIFT, and select an
end event.
2
6. Click Export Selection.
The Export Event Log dialog box opens.
7. Complete these steps on the Export Event Log dialog box.
a. Specify a file name and location or use the default name and location.
b. Check CSV (Comma-Separated Value).
TIP
If you are sending the exported Event Log files to
Rockwell Automation Technical Support, you must use the CSV
file type.
c. Check Include Extended Information.
TIP
If you are sending the exported Event Log files to
Rockwell Automation Technical Support, include the diagnostic
data and extended information.
If you include this data, Rockwell Automation Technical Support
can analyze module and system failures more effectively.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
125
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
8. Click Export.
The event log is exported. The log can take a few minutes to export.
9. If you want to export the secondary redundancy module log for a complete
system view complete step 1…step 8.
IMPORTANT
126
If you are exporting event data to provide to Rockwell Automation Technical
Support to troubleshoot an anomaly, you must obtain the event logs for both
the primary and secondary redundancy modules. Rockwell Automation
Technical Support needs before logs to effectively troubleshoot the anomaly.
If you cannot access the secondary redundancy module’s event log, export it
from the partner event log via the primary redundancy module.
Keep in mind, though, that the primary redundancy module’s view of the
secondary redundancy module’s event log is typically limited. To troubleshoot
an anomaly with Rockwell Automation Technical Support, you must obtain the
secondary redundancy module’s event log from the module’s view itself.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Export All
Use this feature to automatically export all the available event log data for events
in both of the redundancy modules of the redundant chassis pair.
We recommend that you use this feature when troubleshooting system related
anomalies, where the location of a fault could have occurred a lengthy period of
time before the current event.
Complete these steps to export event log data for a single event.
If the redundancy modules are not available in RSLinx Classic software after
a fault, you must apply the recovery method indicated by the module
before attempting to export the Event Log data.
TIP
1. Launch RSLinx Classic communication software and browse to the
redundancy modules.
2. Right-click the primary redundancy module and choose
Module Configuration.
3. On the Event Log tab, click Export All.
4. Click OK.
5. Select the redundancy module in the partner redundant chassis.
6. Complete these steps on the Export Event Log dialog box.
a. Specify a file name and location or use the default name and location.
b. Check CSV (Comma-Separated Value).
TIP
If you are sending the exported Event Log files to
Rockwell Automation Technical Support, you must use the CSV
file type.
c. Check Export Diagnostic Data.
d. Check Include Extended Information.
TIP
If you are sending the exported Event Log files to
Rockwell Automation Technical Support, include the diagnostic
data and extended information.
If you include this data, Rockwell Automation Technical Support
can analyze module and system failures more effectively.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
127
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
7. Click Export.
The event log is exported. The log can take a few minutes to export.
Wait for this dialog box to appear.
A .csv and a .dbg file is in the folder location specified. Make sure to
provide both these files to Rockwell Automation Technical Support when
troubleshooting an anomaly.
128
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Clear a Fault
You can use the Clear Fault feature on the Event Log tab to clear major faults that
occur on a redundancy module.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
With this feature, you can remotely restart the redundancy module without
physically removing and reinserting it from the chassis. The module restart clears
the fault.
IMPORTANT
Export all event and diagnostic data from the module before you clear major
faults from the module. Clear Fault is active only when the redundancy module
is in a major faulted state.
Module faults are displayed on the Module Info tab. This example graphic shows
information for a module that has experienced a major fault.
MAJOR FAULT
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
129
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
System Update Tab
Use of the commands in the System Update tab lets you perform firmware
updates in the secondary chassis while the primary chassis remains in control.
Reference the lock and switchover logs in this tab for update information when
completing a firmware update.
ATTENTION: When performing firmware updates by using commands
in the System Update tab, redundancy is lost. In the event of a fault on
the operating primary chassis, the system cannot switch control to the
secondary chassis.
130
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
System Update Commands
The three system update commands are available only when accessing a primary
redundancy module. These commands are not available when accessing the
secondary redundancy module.
TIP
While you are completing tasks to update the system by using the system
update commands, you cannot access these tabs in the RMCT:
• Configuration
• Synchronization
• Synchronization Status
Attempting to access any of these tabs while the system is locked or is
completing a locked switchover results in a error dialog box.
Lock For Update
The Lock for Update command lets you to synchronize a redundant chassis pair
in these conditions:
• The secondary redundancy module uses updated firmware and an updated
RSLogix 5000 software application program version.
• The running primary redundancy module uses a previous firmware
revision and previous RSLogix 5000 software application program
version.
The Lock for Update command is available only when all the modules in the
primary chassis have no compatibility anomalies. Before issuing the lock
command, verify that you have completed these tasks:
• Set the Auto-Synchronization option in the Configuration tab to Never.
• Disqualify the secondary chassis by using the Disqualify Secondary
command in the Synchronization tab of the secondary redundancy
module’s RMCT.
• Updated the primary and secondary redundancy modules to compatible
firmware revisions.
• Updated all other modules in the secondary chassis to their intended
firmware revisions.
• Made changes to the controller project that are required to accommodate
the update and replacement of modules if needed.
For details about completing those tasks, see Step 4: Update Redundant Chassis
Firmware on page 67.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
131
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Clicking the Lock for Update command initiates the locking process. The lock
can take several minutes to finish. Monitor the System Update Lock Attempts log
to determine when the lock is complete. In addition, the chassis status shown at
the bottom-left of the dialog box changes from Primary with Disqualified
Secondary to Primary Locked for Update.
Figure 31 - Lock for Update Status Updates
Lock initiated.
Lock complete.
Lock complete.
Abort System Lock
The Abort System Lock command can be used to stop the system lock. It is
available as soon as a lock for update is initiated.
Clicking Abort System Lock returns the redundant chassis status to Primary with
Disqualified Secondary. Clicking Abort System Lock also results in the system
update stopping and the program in the secondary controller being cleared. If you
click Abort System Lock, you need to download the program to the secondary
controller before re-attempting a Lock for Update.
132
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Initiate Locked Switchover
The Initiate Locked Switchover command is available only when the chassis
redundancy state is Primary with Locked Secondary. That is, the Initiate Locked
Switchover is available only after the lock for update is complete.
Clicking Initiate Locked Switchover results in your secondary chassis assuming
control and becoming the new primary. The old primary is now the new
secondary chassis and you can update the firmware of the modules in the new
secondary chassis.
Figure 32 - Illustration of Switchover
Chassis A
Chassis B
CH2 CH1 OK
Primary
Secondary
CH2 CH1 OK
Chassis B
Chassis A
CH2 CH1 OK
Secondary
Primary
CH2 CH1 OK
The difference between a locked switchover and a normal switchover is that the
locked switchover can be initiated only by the user. The normal switchover can be
initiated by a user or by a fault in the primary chassis.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
133
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
System Update Lock Attempts
The System Update Lock Attempts is where attempts to lock the system are
logged. This log displays the last four lock attempts and provides this information
specific to each attempt:
• Time and date
• Status (for example, Locked or Abort)
• Result (for example, System Locked or Invalid Response Received)
The status indicated in the System Update Lock Attempts log can be any one of
the states listed in this table.
Table 22 - System Update Lock Attempts Log Statuses
Status
Interpretation
Not Attempted
A system lock has not been attempted since the last
powerup.
In Progress
A lock is in progress.
Locked
The lock was successfully completed.
Abort
The lock attempt failed. The reason for the failure is
indicated in a Result field.
If your status is indicated as Abort, one of these conditions can exist:
• An error occurred while communicating with the partner redundancy
module.
• A module in the secondary chassis does not have a partner in the primary
chassis.
• A module pair is incompatible.
• The SysFail test was unsuccessful in the primary redundancy module.
• A Major Recoverable Fault occurred in primary redundancy module.
• A Major NonRecoverable Fault occurred in primary redundancy module.
• A module was inserted into the chassis.
• A module was removed from the chassis.
• A failed module exists in the secondary chassis.
• A failed module exists in the primary chassis.
• An Abort System Update command received.
• Invalid response was received from a module.
• A module rejected the state change.
• A platform mismatch was detected.
134
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Locked Switchover Attempts
The Locked Switchover Attempts log provides information about the status of
the last four locked switchover attempts. This log includes this information about
each attempt:
• Time and date
• Status
• Result
The status indicated in the Locked Switchover Attempts log can be any one of the
states listed in this table.
Table 23 - Locked Switchover Event Log Statuses
Status
Description
Not Attempted
A locked switchover has not been attempted since the last
powerup.
In Progress
A locked switchover is currently in progress.
Success
A locked switchover was successfully completed.
Abort
The locked switchover attempt failed. The cause of the failure is
indicated in a Result field.
If a locked switchover is aborted, it can be because of the following
• A module declined a locked switchover readiness request.
• An invalid response was received from the locked switchover readiness
request.
• After an initiate switchover prompt, a module rejected the command.
• After an initiate switchover prompt, a module replied with an invalid
response.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
135
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
System Event History
The System Event History tab provides a log of the last 10 major system events.
The events logged here provide information specific to qualification,
disqualification, switchovers, and redundancy module faults.
For each event logged, this information is provided:
• Time and date of the event
• Event class (for example, Qualification or Disqualification)
• Basic info about the origin of the event (for example, Commanded or Auto
Qualification)
• Extended information about the event
• An editable user comment.
136
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Edit a User Comment for a System Event
To edit the User Comment associated with a system event, select the event and
then click Edit. Then type your event description and click Accept Edit.
Save System Event History
If you want to save the system event log to the nonvolatile memory of the
redundancy module, click Save System History at the bottom of the System Event
tab. Saving this history can assist with troubleshooting the system at a later time.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
137
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Using Dual Fiber Ports with
the 1756-RM2/A Redundancy
Module
The dual fiber ports of the 1756-RM2/A module constitute a redundant pair of
communication channels between the partner 1756-RM2s in a redundant chassis
pair. One of the channels is termed as 'ACTIVE', while the other channel is
termed as 'REDUNDANT'. All data communication between the partner
redundancy modules is conducted exclusively over the ACTIVE channel. If or
when the ACTIVE channel fails, a 'Fiber Channel Switchover' is initiated
automatically and all data communication shifts to the REDUNDANT channel,
which then becomes the new ACTIVE channel.
Fiber Channel Switchover
Due to the fiber channel switchover, the redundant chassis pair continues to
remain synchronized even in the event of a failure of the ACTIVE channel. Any
of the following failures of the ACTIVE channel triggers an automatic fiber
channel switchover to the REDUNDANT channel, provided the
REDUNDANT channel is still operating in a normal condition:
• Signal attenuation along the fiber cable path routed between the partner
redundancy modules
• A broken or damaged fiber cable routed between the partner redundancy
modules
• Improper or loosely fit cable connector
• SFP transceiver fault
• Removal or loose connection of the SFP transceiver
• Data communication error (signalled by a failed CRC check)
Chassis synchronization is lost only when both of the channels have failed or are
disconnected.
The fiber channel switchover may occasionally extend the completion of data
communication packets between the partner redundancy modules. Therefore,
the controller's scan time may occasionally experience a delay of 10 ms or less.
Configuration
The use of dual fiber ports is entirely ‘plug & play’. There is no user configuration
needed for any of the operations of the active and redundant channels. The
firmware automatically manages the selection of active and redundant channels.
The dual fiber cables between the partner redundancy modules can be crossed
over between CH1 and CH2 without any restriction.
138
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Chapter 6
Monitoring and Repair
Synchronization is preserved if the REDUNDANT channel has failed or is being
repaired. The repair of the REDUNDANT channel can be performed online
while the redundant chassis pair is running synchronized. To aid online repairs,
the fiber cable connections and SFP transceiver can be removed and inserted
under power.
It is not mandatory to have the REDUNDANT channel connected between the
two redundancy modules. The redundant chassis pair can be synchronized with
just one of the channels connected. The REDUNDANT channel can be
installed later while the chassis is running synchronized.
The status indicators on the front panel and the indicators and counters
displayed in the RMCT provide monitoring of the channel status.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
139
Chapter 6
Configure the Redundancy Modules
Notes:
140
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
7
Program the Redundant Controller
Configure the Redundant
Controller
Topic
Page
Configure the Redundant Controller
141
Crossloads, Synchronization, and Switchovers
144
Crossloads and Scan Time
149
Program to Minimize Scan Times
152
Program to Maintain Data Integrity
159
Program to Optimize Task Execution
163
Program to Obtain System Status
168
Program Logic to Run After a Switchover
170
Use Messages for Redundancy Commands
171
Set the Task Watchdog
175
Download the Project
177
Store a Redundancy Project to Nonvolatile Memory
178
Online Edits
182
Both controllers in the ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system operate by
using the same program. You do not need to create a project for each controller in
the redundant system.
To configure your controllers to operate in a redundant system, complete
these steps
1. Open or create a RSLogix 5000 project for your redundant controller.
2. Access the Controller Properties dialog box for the controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
141
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
3. Click the redundancy tab and check Redundancy Enabled.
4. If you are going to complete edits to your redundant controller while
online, see these sections for information about the parameters available in
the Advanced settings:
• Plan for Test Edits on page 183
• Reserve Memory for Tags and Logic on page 187
5. Click the Advanced tab.
6. Verify that Match Project to Controller is unchecked.
IMPORTANT
142
Do not use Match Project to Controller property with redundant controllers.
If you use the Match Project to Controller property available in the
Advanced tab of the Controller Properties dialog box, you cannot go online
with, download to, or upload from the new primary controller after a
switchover. This is because the serial number of the new primary controller
is not the same as the serial number of the old primary controller and the
project cannot be matched to the newly-switched-to controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Verify this is not
checked.
You have completed the minimum configuration required for your redundant
controllers.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
143
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Crossloads, Synchronization,
and Switchovers
Crossloading and synchronization points are points where the primary controller
transfers data to the secondary controller. Crossload and synchronization points
keep the secondary controller ready to assume control in the event of a fault on
the primary.
Before you begin programming your redundant controller, be aware of the impact
of crossloads and synchronization on the execution of a program after a
switchover. Understanding these concepts helps you to create programming that
best meets the needs for your redundant application.
Continue reading the sections that follow for explanations of crossloads and
synchronization and their relationship to switchovers and program execution.
Changing Crossload and Synchronization Settings
In the enhanced redundancy system, crossload and synchronization points for
programs within the RSLogix 5000 project are configurable. You can limit which
programs are followed by data crossloading and synchronization. In many
applications, changing this setting can reduce the overall impact to the task scan
time by reducing the number of times data is crossloaded.
If you reduce the number of crossload and synchronization points, the switchover
time becomes longer. This increase in switchover time is because more programs
may be rescanned after the switchover.
Synchronization is performed at the end of the last program in the task's program
list, regardless of the program’s Synchronize Data after Execution setting.
To change the synchronization setting of a program, open the program’s Program
Properties dialog box and check or uncheck Synchronize Data after Execution.
Use this setting to change crossload and
synchronization points.
144
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Default Crossload and Synchronization Settings
The default setting for a program in a redundant project is for a crossload to
occur at the end of each program execution. However, for an equipment phase,
the default is that the crossload not execute at the end of the phase.
Before you change the default crossload and synchronization settings, read the
sections that follow so you have a complete understanding of the implications.
For information about how to change the point in a task where a crossload
occurs, see Changing Crossload and Synchronization Settings on page 144.
Recommended Task Types
To avoid anomalies after a switchover occurs, we recommend that you use only
one of these task configurations when programming your redundant controllers.
Use either of the following:
• One continuous task
• Multiple periodic tasks with one task at the highest priority
The sections that follow explain the impact of crossloads and synchronization
after a switchover based on the task structure you use.
Continuous Task After Switchover
After a switchover occurs within a controller project that contains only a
continuous task, the new primary begins executing at the last crossload and
synchronization point. Depending on your crossload and synchronization
setting, the program that the new primary controller begins with may be
the following:
• The program that was interrupted by the switchover
• The program that immediately follows the last crossload and
synchronization point
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
145
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Continuous Task with Crossloads at Each Program End
This diagram demonstrates how programs set to crossload and synchronize at
each program-end are executed after a switchover. As is shown, the new primary
controller begins executing at the beginning of the program that was interrupted
by the switchover. This is the switchover execution that occurs if you use the
default crossload and synchronization setting for a program.
Figure 33 - Program Execution After a Switchover (crossload after each program)
New Primary Controller
Program 3
Program 2
Primary Controller
Program 1
Switchover
Program 1
Program 2
Crossload
Program 3
Crossload
Crossload
Continuous Task with Varying Crossloads at Program End
This diagram demonstrates how programs set to crossload and synchronize at
varying intervals are executed after a switchover. As is shown, the new primary
controller begins executing the program that follows the last crossload and
synchronization point.
Figure 34 - Program Execution After a Switchover (no crossload after each program)
New Primary Controller
Program 2
Program 3
Program 1
Switchover
Primary Controller
Program 1
Program 2
Crossload
Program 3
Crossload
For information about how to change the point in a task where a crossload
occurs, see Changing Crossload and Synchronization Settings on page 144.
146
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Multiple Periodic Tasks
ATTENTION: If you use multiple periodic tasks, program all crucial
outputs within the highest-priority task. Failure to program outputs in
the highest-priority task can result in outputs changing state if a
switchover occurs.
In a project where multiple periodic tasks are used, the point where program
execution begins after a switchover depends on the following:
• Crossload and synchronization settings
• Task priority settings
As with the continuous task, the controller begins executing at the program that
follows the last crossload and synchronization point.
In addition, a higher priority task may interrupt a lower priority task. If a
switchover occurs during or just after the higher priority task executes and the
lower priority task has not been completed, then the lower priority task and
programs are executed from the point at which the last crossload occurred.
This diagram demonstrates how tasks at different priorities execute if a
switchover occurs while a lower priority task is executing. Note that the crossload
and synchronization points in this example are set to occur only at the end of the
last program within the tasks and not at each program’s end.
Figure 35 - Normal Periodic Task Execution (no switchover)
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
147
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
The diagram below shows a lower priority task that has not been completed and a
switchover occurs. The lower priority task and programs are executed from the
beginning of the program where the switchover occurred. This is because the
program uses the default configuration and crossloads and synchronization
points occur at the end of each program.
Primary
New Primary
Figure 36 - Periodic Task Execution After Switchover When Configured to Crossload After
Programs
The diagram below shows a lower priority task that has not been completed and a
switchover occurs. The lower priority task and programs are executed from the
beginning and not at the program where the switchover occurred. This is because
the crossloads and synchronization points were not configured to occur at the
end of each program.
Primary
New Primary
Figure 37 - Periodic Task Execution After Switchover When Configured Not to Crossload After
Programs
For more information about programs and tasks with controllers, see the
Logix5000 Controllers Tasks, Programs, and Routines Programming Manual,
publication 1756-PM005.
148
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Crossloads and Scan Time
Chapter 7
It is important to plan for controller crossloads because the length of the
crossloads affects the scan time of your program. A crossload is a transfer of data
from the primary controller to the secondary controller and may occur at the end
of each program or at the end of the last program in a task.
The scan time of your program or phase is a total of the program execution time
and the crossload time. The diagram below demonstrates this concept.
Figure 38 - Crossload and Scan Time
Execution of Program
Crossload
Program Scan Time
Estimate the Crossload Time
The amount of time required for a crossload is primarily dependent upon the
amount of data being crossloaded. During a crossload, any tag that has been
written to during the program execution is crossloaded. Even if a tag has not
changed, but has been rewritten during the program execution, it will be
crossloaded.
In addition to the time required to transfer tag value changes, the crossload also
requires a small amount of overhead time to communicate information about the
program being executed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
149
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Redundancy Object Attributes for Crossload Times
Before you complete calculations to estimate the crossload time, you need to use a
Get System Value (GSV) instruction to read certain attributes of the redundancy
object. These attributes are data transfer sizes measured in DINTs (4-byte words)
and are used to calculate the estimated crossload time.
TIP
To get these attributes, you do not need to have the secondary chassis
installed or operating. If you do not have the secondary chassis operating,
the attribute values read indicate what data sizes would be transferred if
the secondary chassis was in use.
This table indicates the two attributes you may choose to get specific to the
crossload data transfer size. Get the attribute value that meets your application
requirements.
If you need the
Then get this attribute value
Data size of the last data transferred during the last crossload
LastDataTransferSize
Data size of the largest crossload of data
MaxDataTransferSize
Remember that the LastDataTransferSize attribute refers to the transfer size of
the previous crossload and synchronization point, which occurred prior to the
program containing the GSV instruction.
If you need to measure the crossloaded data from the last program in the task's
program list, you may need to add an additional program at the end of the task
that acquires the LastDataTransferSize value from the program that was formerly
at the end of the task.
150
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Equation for Estimating Crossload Times
After you have either the size of the last data transfer or the maximum size of data
transferred, use this equation to estimate your controllers’ crossload time for each
program.
1756-L6x Controllers
Crossload time per sync point (ms) = (DINTs  0.00091) + 0.6 ms
1756-L7x Controllers
The following equations apply when a 1756-L7x controller is paired with a
redundancy module in both chassis in a redundancy system.
Table 24 - Crossload Times for 1756-L7x Controllers
Controller
Paired with Redundancy Module
Crossload Time
1756-L7x
1756-RM2/A
Crossload time per sync point (ms) = (DINTs * 0.000275) + 0.54 ms
1756-RM/B
Crossload time per sync point (ms) = (DINTs 0.00043) + 0.3 ms
1756-RM/A
Crossload time per sync point (ms) = (DINTs  0.00091) + 0.6 ms
Where DINTs is the size of the data transferred measured in 4-byte words.
TIP
A sync point is a mechanism that the primary controller uses to keep the
secondary controller in sync. By default, at the end of each program scan, the
primary controller sends the secondary controller the sync point and the
secondary controller responds by moving its execution pointer to match the
primary controller.
The default for phases is not to send a sync point.
Beginning in revision 16.05x, the option exists to manipulate the sync points
for faster program execution.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
151
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Program to Minimize Scan
Times
Because your system switchover time is impacted by your total program scan
time, there are several aspects of your program that must be as efficient as possible
to facilitate the fastest possible switchover. The sections that follow indicate
methods of making your program more efficient to minimize your program scan
time.
These methods make your program more efficient and minimize program scan
times:
• Use a 1756-L7x Controller with a 1756-RM2/A Redundancy Module
• Use Multiple Controllers
• Minimize the Number of Programs
• Manage Tags for Efficient Crossloads
• Use Concise Programming
Use a 1756-L7x Controller with a 1756-RM2/A Redundancy Module
Beginning with enhanced redundancy system revision 19.053, you can use
1756-L7x controllers in your application. Relative to the redundancy module
being used, the 1756-L7x controllers scan the controller program faster than
1756-L6x controllers. The 1756-L7x controllers also scan the controller program
fastest if the enhanced redundancy system uses the 1756-RM2/A redundancy
module.
IMPORTANT
Only the 1756-L72, 1756-L73, 1756-L74, and 1756-L75 controllers can be used
in conjunction with the 1756-RM2/A redundancy modules and revision
19.053. See Components Available for Use in a Redundant Chassis Pair on
page 24.
If your application needs better controller performance, we recommend that you
update from 1756-L6x controllers to 1756-L7x controllers and use 1756-RM2/
A redundancy modules.
Use Multiple Controllers
When possible, use multiple controllers in your redundant system. If you use
multiple controllers, you can strategically program between the controllers so the
program execution and scan times are faster.
For more information about controllers that can be paired in redundant chassis,
see Components of an Enhanced Redundancy System on page 24.
152
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Minimize the Number of Programs
When programming a redundant controller, use the fewest programs possible.
Using the fewest programs possible is especially important if you plan to
crossload data and synchronize the controllers after the execution of each
program.
If you need to crossload data at the end of each program, make these
programming considerations to minimize the crossload impact on the program
scan time:
• Use only one or a few programs.
• Divide each program into the number of routines that is appropriate for
your application. A routine does not cause a crossload or increase the scan
time.
• Use the main routine of each program to call the other routines of the
program.
• If you want to use more than one task for different scan periods, use only
one program in each task.
Figure 39 - Use of Multiple Routines (preferred)
Figure 39 - Use of Multiple Programs (not
preferred)
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
153
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Manage Tags for Efficient Crossloads
To program for more efficient crossloads of data and to reduce the amount of
time required for a crossload to execute, manage your data tags as recommended
in these sections.
Delete Unused Tags
Deleting unused tags reduces the size of the tag database. A smaller database takes
less time to crossload.
Use Arrays and User-Defined Data Types
If you use arrays and User-Defined Data Types, the tags use smaller 4-byte (32bit) words for all of the data in the type or array. If you create an individual tag,
the controller reserves 4 bytes (32 bits) of memory even if the tag uses only 1 bit.
Arrays and User-Defined Data Types help conserve the most memory with
BOOL tags. However, we also recommend you use them for your SINT, INT,
DINT, REAL, COUNTER, and TIMER tags.
Figure 40 - Example Savings with the Use of an Array
12 bytes of data to crossload (4
bytes for each tag).
4 bytes of data to crossload.
TIP
If you have already created individual tags and programming that uses
those tags, consider changing the individual tags to alias tags that
reference the elements in an array.
If you choose to do this, your programming can still reference the individual
tag names, but the crossload transfers the base array.
For more information about working with arrays, User-Defined Data Types, and
alias tags, see the Logix5000 Controllers I/O and Tag Data Programming
Manual, publication 1756-PM004.
154
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Group Data Types Together in User-Defined Data Types
When you create a User-Defined Data Type for use in your redundancy program,
group like data types together. Grouping like data types compresses the data size
and helps reduce the amount of data transferred during a crossload.
Figure 41 - Example of Bytes Saved by Grouping Like Data
Figure 42 - Data Types
Figure 42 - Data Types Grouped
Group Data into Arrays of User-Defined Data Types by Frequency of Use
To update the secondary controller, the primary controller divides its memory
into blocks of 256 bytes. Anytime an instruction writes a value, the primary
controller crossloads the entire block that contains the value. For example, if your
logic writes only 1 BOOL value to a block, the controller crossloads the entire
block (256 bytes).
To minimize crossload time, group your data by how frequently your program
uses it.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
155
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
For example, if your application uses DINTs that you use only as constants to
initialize your logic, BOOLs that you update every scan, and REALs that you
update every second, you can create a separate User-Defined Data Type for each
type of tag that is used at different points in the application. Using separate UserDefined Data Types for each group, rather than grouping all of the tags together
in one User-Defined Data Type, helps to minimize the amount of data
transferred during the crossload.
Figure 43 - Tags Grouped into User-Defined Data Types by
Frequency of Use
Figure 43 - Tags in One User-Defined Data Type
Use DINT Tags Instead of SINT or INT Tags when Possible
We recommend that you use the DINT data type instead of the SINT or INT
data types because the controller usually works with 32-bit values (DINTs or
REALs). When processing, the controller converts SINT or INT tag values to
DINT or REAL values. When processing is complete, the controller converts the
value back to a SINT or INT value.
The controller automatically converts these data types while executing and
processing a program. No additional programming is required. However, while
this conversion process is transparent to you, it does require additional processing
time that impacts your program scan time and your switchover time.
156
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Use Concise Programming
Use these recommendations to create concise programming. Using concise
programming makes your program execute faster and reduces your program scan
time.
Execute an Instruction Only when Needed
We recommend that you execute instructions only when needed because each
time an instruction writes a value to a tag, the tag is crossloaded to the secondary
controller. Even if the tag values is the same, it is rewritten and is therefore
crossloaded.
Because many instructions write tag values whenever executed, strategic and
economical use of instructions is needed. Strategic programming techniques
include the following:
• Using preconditions to limit the execution of instructions
• Combining preconditions when possible
• Dividing programming into subroutines that are called only when required
• Running noncritical code every 2 or 3 scans instead of during every scan
For example, precondition an ADD instruction to run only when the controller
gets new data. As a result, the Dest_Tag is crossloaded only when the ADD
instruction produces a new value.
Figure 44 - Precondition Used with ADD Instruction
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
157
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
In addition to using preconditions, try to group instructions that can be
preconditioned by the same instructions together. In this example, the four
preconditions used in the two branches can be combined to precede the two
branches. Doing so reduces the number of precondition instructions from four to
two.
Figure 45 - Efficient Precondition Use
158
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Program to Maintain Data
Integrity
Chapter 7
When programming your redundant controllers, there are some instructions and
techniques that may cause data loss or corruption when used. These instructions
and techniques include the following:
• Array (File)/Shift Instructions
• Scan-dependent Logic
Array (File)/Shift Instructions
Interruptions to Array (File)/Shift Instructions by an a higher priority task and
then switchover can result in an incomplete data shift and corrupted data.
These Array (File)/Shift instructions may result in corrupt data in the event of a
switchover:
• Bit Shift Left (BSL)
• Bit Shift Right (BSR)
• FIFO Unload (FFU)
If Array (File)/Shift Instructions are used, these system behaviors may result:
1. If a higher priority task interrupts one of the Array (File)/Shift
instructions, the partially-shifted array values are crossloaded to the
secondary controller.
2. If a switchover occurs before the instruction completes its execution, data
remains only partially shifted.
3. After a switchover, the secondary controller starts its executing at the
beginning of the program. When it reaches the partially-executed
instruction, it shifts the data again.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
159
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Buffering Critical Data
If you cannot place Array (File)/Shift instructions in the highest-priority task,
consider using a buffer with Copy File (COP) and Synchronous Copy File (CPS)
instructions to maintain the integrity of the array of data.
The programming example shown here shows the use of a COP instruction to
move data into a buffer array. The BSL instruction uses the data in that buffer
array. The CPS instruction updates the array tag and maintains data integrity
because it cannot be interrupted by a higher priority task. If a switchover occurs,
the source data (that is, the array tag) remains unaffected.
Figure 46 - Using a Buffer to Maintain Data During Shift
For more information about BSL, BSR, FFU, COP, and CPS instructions see the
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication
1756-RM003.
Scan-dependent Logic
If you program a lower priority task so that one instruction is dependent on
another instruction that occurs elsewhere in your program, your programming
may be disrupted by a task interrupt and switchover. The disruption can occur
because the lower priority task may be interrupted by the higher priority task and
then a switchover may occur before the lower priority task is completed.
When the lower priority task is executed from the beginning by the new primary
controller after the switchover, the dependent instruction may not execute at the
most recent value or state.
160
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
For example, if a higher priority task interrupts the logic shown in this example,
the value of scan_count.ACC is sent to the secondary controller at the end of the
program in the higher priority task. If a switchover occurs before the primary
controller completes the EQU instruction, the new primary controller starts its
execution at the beginning of the program and the EQU instruction misses the
last value of scan_count.ACC. As a result, any programming that uses the
Scan_Count_Light tag may also execute by using incorrect data.
Table 25 - Scan-dependent Logic
Interrupt by higher
priority task.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Switchover
161
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Bind Dependent Instructions with UID and UIE Instructions
If you cannot place scan-dependent instructions in the highest priority task,
consider using the User Interrupt Disable (UID) and User Interrupt Enable
(UIE) to prevent a higher priority task from interrupting the scan-dependent
logic.
For example, if you bind the scan-dependent logic previously shown, a higher
priority task would not interrupt the dependent instructions and a switchover
would not result in inconsistent data.
Figure 47 - Scan-dependent Instructions Bound with UID and UIE Instructions
UID and UIE keep
higher priority tasks
from interrupting
the logic.
For more information about UID and UIE instructions, see the Logix5000
Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003.
162
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Program to Optimize Task
Execution
To make synchronization, crossloads, and HMI updates as fast as possible, make
adjustments to the System Overhead Time Slice and the type of tasks used. These
adjustments affect service communication tasks that take place during the time
when the continuous task is not executing.
This table lists some of the communication that takes place during an continuous
task and service communication periods.
Table 26 - Communication Tasks during Scheduled and Unscheduled Periods
During
These types of communication occur
Task execution
Update I/O data (not including block-transfers)
Produced/consumed tags
Service
communication
Communication with programming devices (for example, RSLogix 5000 software)
Communication with HMI devices
Execution of Message (MSG) instructions, including block-transfers
Responses to messages from other controllers
Synchronization of the redundant system
Reestablishment and monitoring of I/O connections, such as Removal and Insertion Under
Power conditions. This does not include normal I/O updates that occur during the execution of
logic
Bridging of communication from the serial port of the controller to other ControlLogix devices
via the ControlLogix backplane
To increase service communication to allow for synchronization and the
updating of HMI, consider using the techniques described in this table.
Table 27 - Methods to Increase Service Communication Periods
If your RSLogix 5000 project contains
Then see
On Page
Only a continuous task with no other tasks (This is the
default task configuration.)
Specify a Larger System Overhead Time
Slice
164
More than one task (for example, at least 2 periodic tasks) Use Periodic Tasks
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
167
163
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Specify a Larger System Overhead Time Slice
The system overhead time slice specifies the percentage of time the controller
devotes to servicing communication, excluding the time for periodic tasks. The
controller interrupts the continuous task to service communication, and then
resumes the continuous task.
This table shows the ratio between executing the continuous task and servicing
communication at various overhead time slices. Consider the following:
• When the system overhead time slice setting is between 10% and up to
50%, the time allocated for servicing communication is fixed at 1 ms, and
the continuous task time slice changes to produce the desired ratio.
• When the system overhead time slice is greater than 50…90%, the time
allocated to the continuous task is fixed at 1 ms, and the time allocated to
servicing communication changes to produce the desired ratio.
Table 28 - Overhead Time Slice
164
At this time slice
The continuous tasks runs for
And service communication occurs for as
long as
10%
9 ms
1 ms
20%
4 ms
1 ms
25%
3 ms
1 ms
33%
2 ms
1 ms
50%
1 ms
1 ms
66%
1 ms
2 ms
75%
1 ms
3 ms
80%
1 ms
4 ms
90%
1 ms
9 ms
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
System Overhead Time Slice Examples
This diagram illustrates a system where the System Overhead Time Slice is set to
20% (default). With this percentage, communication is serviced after every 4 ms
of continuous task execution. Communication is serviced for up to 1 ms before
the continuous task is restarted.
Figure 48 - System Overhead Time Slice Set to 20%
Legend:
Task executes.
Task is interrupted (suspended).
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
Service Communication
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
Continuous Task
This diagram illustrates a system where the System Overhead Time Slic is set to
33%. With this percentage, communication is serviced after every 2 ms of
continuous task execution. Communication is serviced for up to 1 ms before the
continuous task is restarted.
Figure 49 - System Overhead Time Slice Set to 33%
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
Service Communication
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms
Continuous Task
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
165
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Change the System Overhead Time Slice
To change the System Overhead Time Slice, access the Controller Properties
dialog box and click the Advanced tab. You can enter your System Overhead
Time Slice value.
Options for During the Unused System Overhead Time Slice
Enable the Run Continuous Task option (default setting) if you want the
controller to revert to running the continuous task as soon as the communication
servicing task has no pending activity. This has the effect of only using the
allocated communication servicing time if there is a need for it.
When the Run Continuous Task option enabled, the controller immediately
returns to the continuous task.
Use the Reserve for System Task option to allocate the entire 1 ms of the System
Overhead Time Slice for service communication - even if no service
communication or background tasks need to be executed. You might choose to
use this option without service communication or background tasks to simulate a
communication load on the controller during design and programming. Use this
setting for testing purposes only.
166
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Use Periodic Tasks
If you have multiple tasks in your project, changing the System Overhead Time
Slice does not affect how communication is serviced. To increase the time to
service communication when multiple tasks are used, configure the periodic tasks
such that more time might be available to service communication.
TIP
While you can use multiple periodic tasks in your
redundant controller program, use the fewest number of
tasks possible.
If you use periodic tasks, communication is serviced any time a task is not
running. For example, if you configure your task period at 80 ms and the task
executes in 50 ms, the controller has 30 ms out of every 80 ms to service
communication.
Figure 50 - Periodic Task Execution and Service Communication
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
Task Execution
30 ms
30 ms
30 ms
Service Communication
Periodic Task
Periodic Task
Periodic Task
If you use multiple periodic tasks, verify the following:
• The execution time of a highest priority task is significantly smaller than
its period.
• The total execution time of all your tasks is significantly less than the
period of the lowest priority tasks.
Verifying those settings generally leaves enough time for service communication.
The example configuration of tasks shown here demonstrates those
configuration settings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
167
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Example of Periodic Task Configurations
Task
Priority
Execution Time
Period Specified
1
Higher
20 ms
80 ms
2
Lower
30 ms
100 ms
Total execution time:
50 ms
In this example, the execution time of the highest priority task (Task 1) is
significantly smaller than its period, that is, 20 ms is less than 80 ms, and the total
execution time of all the tasks is significantly smaller than the specified period of
the lowest priority task, that is, 50 ms is less than 180 ms.
Tuning the Period Specified
You may need to tune the period you specify for your periodic tasks to balance
program execution and service communication.
TIP
The crossloading of data during synchronization points extends task scan times
in enhanced redundancy systems. We recommend that you balance program
execution and service communication when the system is synchronized.
To check for overlaps, go online with the controller and access the Task
Properties dialog box. In the Monitor tab, note the maximum scan time. Verify
that the maximum scan time is smaller than the period you specified for the
periodic task.
Program to Obtain System
Status
For most redundant applications, you need to program to obtain the status of the
system. Program to obtain system status when you do the following:
• Program HMI to display the system status
• Precondition logic to execute based on the system status
• Use the diagnostic information to troubleshoot the system
To obtain the status of your redundant system, use a Get System Value (GSV)
instruction in your program and plan for the tags you are writing the values to.
168
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
In the example below, the GSV instruction is used to obtain the chassis ID (that
is, the chassis A or B designation) of the chassis that is functioning as the primary.
The PhysicalChassisID value is stored in the PRIM_Chassis_ID_Now tag. The
PhysicalChassisID value retrieved matches the Chassis ID indicated in the
Controller Properties dialog box.
If the Physical Chassis ID value is
Then the chassis ID is
0
Unknown
1
Chassis A
2
Chassis B
Figure 51 - GSV Instruction to Get Chassis ID
Ladder Logic
Structured Text
Chassis ID in Controller
For more information about the REDUNDANCY object attributes, see
Appendix E, Redundancy Object Attributes on page 273.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
169
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Program Logic to Run After a
Switchover
If your application requires certain logic or instructions to be executed after a
switchover, then use programming and tags similar to that shown in this example.
Figure 52 - Precondition Used to Run Logic After Switchover - Ladder Logic
Add your switchover-dependent instructions here.
170
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Use Messages for
Redundancy Commands
Chapter 7
For some applications, you may want to program the controller to issue
redundancy system commands via the redundancy modules. The sections that
follow explain how to configure a MSG instruction to issue a redundancy
command.
Verify User Program Control
For a MSG instruction to issue a command via the redundancy modules, the
redundancy modules must be configured for user program control.
To verify that the modules are enabled for user program control, access the
Configuration tab of the RMCT and verify that Enable User Program Control is
checked.
Figure 53 - Enable User Program Control in the RMCT
Use an Unconnected Message
When you add your MSG instruction that is to be used for issuing the command
through the redundancy modules, configure it as an unconnected message.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
171
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Configure the MSG Instruction
Use the MSG configuration settings that correspond to the command you intend
to issue to the redundancy modules.
If you need to
See page
Initiate a Switchover
172
Disqualify the Secondary Chassis
174
Synchronize the Secondary Chassis
174
Set the Redundancy Module Date and Time
175
Initiate a Switchover
To initiate a switchover, use the MSG instruction parameters listed in this table.
Table 29 - MSG Instruction to Initiate a Switchover
In this tab
Edit this element
To use this value
Configuration
Message Type
CIP Generic
Service Type
Custom
Service Code
4e
Class
bf
Instance
1
Attribute
None - no value needed
Source Element
INT tag with a value of 1
Source Length
2
Destination Element
None - no value needed.
Path
Browse for the path to the 1756-RM or
1756-RMXT redundancy module.
Connected box
Leave the Connected checkbox unchecked.
Communication
172
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Use this table to when using MSG instructions during a switchover.
Table 30 - MSG Instruction Behavior During a Switchover
If the MSG instruction
is
Then
From a redundant controller
In a redundant controller, any MSG instruction that is in progress during a switchover experiences an error.
(The ER bit of the instruction turns on.) After the switchover, normal communication resumes.
To a redundant controller
For any MSG instruction from a controller in another chassis to a redundant controller, cache the connection:
Properties of the Message to the Redundant Controller
Configured Message Instructions
If the MSG instruction
originates from a
redundant controller
Then
During a switchover
The message instructions status bits are updated asynchronously to the program scan. Consequently, you
cannot crossload your message instructions status bits to a secondary controller.
During a switchover, any active message instructions become inactive. When this occurs, you will need to
reinitialize the execution of your message instructions in the new primary controller.
During qualification
The scrolling display changes from CMPT for compatible to Qfng for qualifying.
• If a configured message is cached, the primary controller automatically establishes a connection with no errors.
• If a configured message is uncached or unconnected, the primary controller receives Error 1 Extended Error 301, No Buffer
Memory.
If the message is targeted to a
redundant controller
Then
During the erroring out of a message
All backplane communication ceases. This stoppage allows the redundant controller to receive the message
instruction required to perform a switchover or any diagnostics.
Important: If any of your messages are active during a switchover, you can expect one of these things to happen:
• Cached and connected messages cause the message instruction to pause for 7.5 seconds because the
initiating controller has not received a response from the targeted controller. For cached messages, the
message instruction tries to execute three more times, each attempt followed by a pause of 7.5 seconds.
If, after 30 seconds pass, the targeted controller does not respond to the initiating controller, then the
switchover errors out with connected time out Error 1 Extended Error 203.
An example of a connected message would be CIP data table read-and-write messages after a
connection has been established.
• Uncached messages error out after 30 seconds if you have just initiated them because the initiating
controller never received a reply to the forward-open request. The error is Error 1F Extended Error 204,
an unconnected time out.
Examples of uncached messages would include CIP generic messages and messages captured during the
connection process.
During qualification
Cached messages run with no errors. A connection has been established.
Connected, but uncached, messages or unconnected messages error out with Error 1 Extended Error 301, No
Buffer Memory.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
173
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Disqualify the Secondary Chassis
To disqualify the secondary chassis, use the MSG instruction parameters listed in
this table.
Table 31 - Disqualify the Secondary Chassis
In this tab
Configuration
Communication
Edit this element
To use this value
Message Type
CIP Generic
Service Type
Custom
Service Code
4d
Class
bf
Instance
1
Attribute
None - no value needed
Source Element
INT tag with a value of 1
Source Length
2
Destination Element
None - no value needed.
Path
Browse for the path to the 1756-RM or
1756-RMXT redundancy module.
Connected box
Leave the Connected checkbox unchecked.
Synchronize the Secondary Chassis
To disqualify the secondary controller, use the MSG instruction parameters listed
in this table.
Table 32 - Synchronize the Secondary Chassis
In this tab
Edit this element
To use this value
Configuration
Message Type
CIP Generic
Service Type
Custom
Service Code
4c
Class
bf
Instance
1
Attribute
None - no value needed
Source Element
INT tag with a value of 1
Source Length
2
Destination Element
None - no value needed.
Path
Browse for the path to the 1756-RM or
1756-RMXT redundancy module.
Connected box
Leave the Connected checkbox unchecked.
Communication
174
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Set the Redundancy Module Date and Time
To set the wallclock time of the 1756-RM module, use the MSG instruction
parameters listed in this table.
Table 33 - Set Wallclock Time
In this tab
Configuration
Communication
Set the Task Watchdog
Edit this element
To use this value
Message Type
CIP Generic
Service Type
Custom
Service Code
10
Class
8b
Instance
1
Attribute
b
Source Element
WallClockTime[0]
WallClockTime is a DINT[2] array that stores the
CurrentValue of the WALLCLOCKTIME object
Source Length
8
Destination Element
None - no value needed.
Path
Browse for the path to the 1756-RM or
1756-RMXT redundancy module.
Connected box
Leave the Connected checkbox unchecked.
Watchdog times set for tasks in redundancy applications must be larger than
watchdog times set for tasks in nonredundancy applications because more time is
required to conduct crossloads and synchronization.
An increase in the required watchdog time is also a result of the way programs are
executed in the event of a switchover. A program or programs may be executed a
second time after switchover, depending on when in the task or program the
switchover occurs and where in the task crossload and synchronization occurs.
If a program is executed a second time, the length of time required for the
program scan is increased. However, the watchdog timer is not reset and
continues to countdown from the beginning of the task that was started by the
old primary controller. Therefore, the watchdog timer must be configured to
account for the potential of additional program scans.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
175
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
We recommend that you reevaluate the watchdog times in your application if
either of these events occur:
• A second controller is added to a redundancy chassis.
• The application in a second controller that is already in the system is
modified.
Figure 54 - Watchdog Configured for Redundancy Switchover
In the event of a watchdog timeout, a major fault (type 6, code 1) results. If this
fault occurs after a switchover, the control system fails-to-safe or to the
configured hold state.
Figure 55 - Watchdog Not Configured for Redundancy Switchover
176
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Minimum Value for the Watchdog Time
To set Watchdog time for your 1756-L6x controllers, use this table to determine
which equation to use to calculate the time for each task.
If
Then use this equation
Using ControlNet I/O ms
(2 * maximum_scan_time) + 150
Using Ethernet I/O ms
(2 * maximum _scan_time) + 100
The maximum_scan_time is the maximum scan time for the entire task when the
secondary controller is synchronized.
To set the 1756-L7x initial task tuning, follow these steps.
IMPORTANT
This works only when there is no Continuous task configured in the Logix application.
1. Monitor the Max Scan Time for each task while the redundant chassis pair
is synchronized.
2. Set the Watchdog times for each task to 3 times the Max Scan Time.
3. Use the Logix5000 Task Monitor Tool to configure each Task Period. (1)
• Adjust the Task periods of each so that the maximum scan time is less than
80% of the task period rate.
• Adjust the Task periods so that the Logix CPU % utilization is never above
75%.
• While performing these tests, the HMI and any other external systems
must be connected to the Logix controller.
IMPORTANT
Download the Project
Verify that there are no task overlaps.
Download the project only to the primary controller. When the secondary
controller is synchronized, the system automatically crossloads the project to the
secondary controller.
IMPORTANT
If the secondary chassis was qualified and becomes disqualified after you
download the project, verify that you have enabled the controller for
redundancy.
(1) See the PlantPAx Automation System Reference Manual, publication PROCES-RM001.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
177
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Store a Redundancy Project
to Nonvolatile Memory
Use this procedure to store an updated project and firmware to the nonvolatile
memory card of the controller.
IMPORTANT
The controllers use these nonvolatile memory cards.
Cat. No.
Nonvolatile Memory Card
1756-L6x
1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash cards
1756-L7x
1784-SD1 or 1784-SD2 Secure Digital cards
This section describes how to store a project to nonvolatile memory in either of
these conditions:
• Store a Project While the Controller is in Program or Remote Program
Mode
• Store a Project While a System is Running
IMPORTANT
178
We recommend that you store the same project on both controllers’
nonvolatile memory cards. By doing so, you can be assured that if a controller,
primary or secondary, loses the project from its internal memory, you can load
the most recent project back onto that controller.
If you store the same project on both controllers’ nonvolatile memory cards,
while the process is running, you must save the project on the controllers while
they are in the secondary controller state. To do so, you save the project on the
secondary controller, conduct a switchover and save the project on the new
secondary controller.
For more information, see the steps below.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Store a Project While the Controller is in Program or Remote Program
Mode
If you want to store your controller project in nonvolatile memory while your
redundant system is not running, complete these steps. Before you begin, verify
that a controller communication path has been specified and that you are able to
go online with the primary controller.
1. Verify that the redundant chassis are synchronized. If they are not
synchronized, synchronize them.
2. Use RSLogix 5000 software or the mode switch to put the primary
controller into Program or Remote Program mode.
3. In RSLinx Classic communication software, right-click the 1756-RM
module and choose Module Configuration to open the RMCT.
4. In the Configuration tab, set the Auto-Synchronization parameter to
Conditional.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
179
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
5. On the Synchronization tab, click Disqualify Secondary.
6. In RSLogix 5000 software, access the Controller Properties dialog box and
click the Nonvolatile Memory tab.
7. Click Load/Store.
8. Click <-- Store and then click Yes.
When the store is complete, we go online with the secondary controller.
9. Complete steps 6…8 to store the project in nonvolatile memory of the
secondary controller.
10. In RSLinx Classic software, open the RMCT for one of the redundancy
modules in the redundant pair.
11. In the Synchronization tab, click Synchronize Secondary.
12. In the Configuration tab, set the Auto-Synchronization option to your
desired setting.
180
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Store a Project While a System is Running
If you want to store your controller project in nonvolatile memory while your
redundant system is running, complete these steps.
1. Verify that the redundant chassis are synchronized.
2. In the RMCT, access the Configuration tab and set the AutoConfiguration parameter to Never.
3. In the Synchronization tab, click Disqualify Secondary.
4. Go online with the secondary controller.
IMPORTANT
Do not go back online with the primary controller until you have completed
this procedure.
5. Open the Controller Properties dialog box and click the Nonvolatile
Memory tab.
6. Click Load/Store then <-- Store to store the project in nonvolatile
memory.
7. In the RMCT, click the Synchronization tab.
8. Click Synchronize Secondary and wait for the system to synchronize.
9. Click Initiate Switchover.
10. Go online with the new secondary controller.
11. Complete steps 5 and 6 to store the project.
12. In the RMCT, click the Configuration tab and set the AutoConfiguration to your desired setting.
13. In the Synchronization tab, click Synchronize Secondary.
You have completed the steps required to store your project while online.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
181
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Load a Project
If you need to load a project from nonvolatile memory, you must first disqualify
your redundancy system. You then load the project from the primary controller
and resynchronize the redundant chassis once the load is complete.
For details about loading a project from nonvolatile memory, see the Logix5000
Controllers Memory Card Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM017.
Online Edits
You can edit the redundant controller program while the system is online and
running. However, in addition to considerations described in the Logix5000
Controllers Quick Start, publication 1756-QS001, considerations specific to
redundancy must be made.
Support for Partial Import Online
Beginning with enhanced redundancy system revision 19.052 or later, you can
use the Partial Import Online (PIO) feature available in RSLogix 5000 software.
Consider these points when using PIO with enhanced redundancy systems at
revision 19.052 or later:
• If you select Import Logix Edits as Pending or Accept Program Edits
when executing a PIO, the primary controller treats the PIO feature as a
set of multiple test edits where, after the import is complete, you can
switch between testing the edits or not.
• We recommend that you do not use Finalize All Edits in Program when
importing edits. If you use this option, any failure due to the import causes
a failure on the new primary controller after a switchover.
• If edits exist in the primary controller due to a PIO, they are treated the
same as normal test edits with respect to the ‘Retain Test Edits at
Switchover’ selection and Redundancy System Update.
• The primary controller rejects any attempt to qualify if a PIO is in
progress.
• If you attempt to initiate a PIO on a primary controller in the process of
qualifying the system, that PIO is rejected.
182
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
• A PIO to a primary controller may fail if a switchover occurs while the
PIO is still in process.
When the anomaly occurs and the PIO fails, you may see any of these
errors:
– Failed to import file 'c\...\xxx.L5x
Object already exists
– Failed to import file 'c\...\xxx.L5x
Already in request mode/state
– CIP error: Problem with a semaphore
– Internal Object Identifier (IOI) destination unknown
After switchover is complete, re-attempt the PIO and it completes
successfully.
There are additional considerations necessary to performing online edits:
• Plan for Test Edits
• Reserve Memory for Tags and Logic
• Finalize Edits with Caution
Plan for Test Edits
Before you begin making edits to your redundant program while your system is
running, verify that the Retain Test Edits on Switchover setting meets your
application requirements.
IMPORTANT
We recommend that you leave the Retain Test Edits on Switchover setting
at the default (that is, unchcecked) to avoid faulting both controllers when
testing your edits.
If you enable the system to retain the test edits on a switchover (that is, you check
Retain Test Edits on Switchover), faults that result from the test edits can also
occur on the new primary controller after a switchover.
If you do not enable the system to retain the test edits on a switchover (that is,
you leave Retain Test Edits on Switchover unchecked), faults that result from the
test edits are not carried over to the new primary controller in the event of a
switchover.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
183
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Use this table to determine the Retain Test Edits on Switchover setting that suits
your application.
If you need to
Then
Prevent a test edit from faulting both the primary and secondary
controller
Leave Retain Test Edits on Switchover
unchecked
Keep test edits active, even in the event of a switchover and at the risk
of faulting both controllers
Check Retain Test Edits on Switchover
To change the Retain Test Edits on Switchover setting, click the Redundancy tab
in the Controller Properties then click Advanced.
Figure 56 - Retain Test Edits on Switchover
184
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
IMPORTANT
Chapter 7
When using a 1756-L7x redundancy controller using version 19 software, and
the Memory Usage slider is set all the way to Tags, the first synchronization
attempt will be successful, but after switchover or disqualification, the next
qualification attempt will fail, and one or more entries will appear in the
secondary redundancy module event log with the following description: ‘(14)
Error Setting Up Data Tracking.’
To recover from this issue, move the slider slightly to the right. This must be
done offline or in Program mode. Additionally, you must download the
updated application to the disqualified secondary to update its configuration.
The next qualification attempt is successful.
Memory Usage Slider
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
185
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Finalize Edits with Caution
When you finalize edits to your program while online, the original program that
existed before the changes were made is deleted. As a result, if the edits you
finalize cause a fault on the primary controller, the new primary controller will
also fault after the switchover.
Before you finalize any edits to your program, test the edits to verify that faults do
not occur.
Figure 57 - Test Edits Before Finalizing
Test Pending Edits
TIP
186
Finalize All Edits
Even if you have not enabled the Retain Test Edits on Switchover property,
faults can still occur on the primary and secondary controllers if the edits
are finalized.
The Retain Test Edits on Switchover property affects only edits that are
being tested. The Retain Test Edits on Switchover does not affect the
redundant controllers that are running finalized edits.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Program the Redundant Controller
Chapter 7
Reserve Memory for Tags and Logic
Depending on your redundant application, you may need to change the memory
usage property for your redundant controller. The setting you specify impacts
how the controller divides memory for tags and logic to be stored to the buffer
during a crossload to the secondary controller.
IMPORTANT
For most applications, we recommend that the Memory Usage slider
remain at its default position (center).
This table indicates when you might need to change the memory usage setting.
Table 34 - Possible Memory Usage Setting Change
If your online edits are primarily changes to
Then move the Memory Usage slider towards
Tags with little or no changes to logic
Tags
Logic with little or no new tags created
Logic
IMPORTANT
Do not set the Memory Usage slider all the way to Tags or Logic:
• If you move the slider all the way to Tags, you may not be able to perform edits while online
and OPC communication may fail.
• If you move the slider all the way to Logic, you cannot create or edit any tags while online.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
187
Chapter 7
Program the Redundant Controller
Notes:
188
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
8
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy
System
Topic
Page
Tasks to Monitor the System
189
Controller Logging
189
Use Programming to Monitor System Status
190
Verify Date and Time Settings
191
Verify System Qualification
192
Check the ControlNet Module Status
197
Tasks to Monitor the System
This chapter describes some of the key tasks to complete to monitor and
maintain your enhanced redundancy system.
Controller Logging
Beginning with enhanced redundancy system revision 19.052, you can use the
controller logging feature. This feature provides a way to detect and log changes,
that is, RSLogix 5000 software and controller mode switch interactions, made to
ControlLogix 1756-L6x and 1756-L7x controllers without adding any auditing
software.
With controller logging, the controller can perform these tasks:
• Detect changes and create logs entries containing information about the
changes.
• Store the log entries to a Compact FLASH (CF) card or Secure Digital
(SD) card for later review.
• Provide programmatic access to log entry counters to provide change
detection information remotely
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
189
Chapter 8
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Controller Log
A controller log is the record of changes. The log is stored on the controller’s
NVS memory automatically. You can store the log to a CF card or SD card on an
as needed basis or automatically at predefined times. The controller’s NVS
memory and each external memory card type have a maximum number entries
they can store.
Specific events are stored in the controller’s log.
For more information on controller logging, see Logix5000 Controllers
Information and Status Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM015.
Controller Logging in Enhanced Redundancy Systems
Because enhanced redundancy systems operate with partnered controllers, there
are considerations you must consider with regard to controller logging:
• The primary and secondary controllers maintain separate logs.
• You do not need to synchronize the logs.
• On the primary controller, controller logging occurs exactly as it does on a
controller in a nonredundant system, regardless of whether the system is
qualified and synchronized or disqualified.
• A secondary controller logs the removal or insertion of removable storage
components, that is, a CF or SD card, in any operating state. Otherwise,
the secondary controller only logs events that occur when the controller is
in a disqualified state.
Use Programming to Monitor
System Status
190
IMPORTANT
When programming your enhanced redundancy system, program so your
redundancy system status is continually monitored and displayed on your
HMI device.
If your redundancy system becomes disqualified or a switchover occurs, the
change in status is not automatically annunciated. You must program the
system to communicate the change in status via your HMI or other statusmonitoring device.
For more information and programming techniques, see Program to Obtain
System Status on page 168.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Verify Date and Time
Settings
Chapter 8
After you have completed programming your redundant system and have
downloaded your program to the primary controller, check the Redundancy
Module Date and Time information and verify it matches the date and time of
your system.
TIP
2
Consider checking the Redundancy Module Date and Time as a part of your
regular maintenance procedures. Verifying the date and time information
on a regular basis keeps the event logs of the redundancy modules
accurate.
If the date and time are not correct, the redundant system event logs will not
match the date and time information for the rest of the system. Incorrect date and
time information complicates troubleshooting if an event or error occurs on your
redundant system.
Verify Date and Time
Settings
IMPORTANT
If power to one of the redundancy modules is cycled, the redundancy
module will power up with the time set to when the power was lost. If the
partner redundancy module has remained active during this time, the time
set in that module will be automatically transferred to the powering-up
module. If a power failure event happens so that both modules are shut off,
reset the time and date in the RMCT.
Setting and verifying the date and time settings after a power loss will help
with troubleshooting if an error or event occurs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
191
Chapter 8
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Verify System Qualification
After you have completed programming your redundant system and have
downloaded your program to the primary controller, check the system status to
verify that the system is qualified and synchronized.
TIP
The system qualification process can take several minutes. After a
qualification command or a switchover, allow time for qualification to
complete before taking action based on the qualification status.
Check Qualification Status via Module Status Displays
You can view qualification status by using the status displays and indicators of the
secondary redundancy module and the primary and secondary ControlNet and
EtherNet/IP communication modules.
Table 35 - Synchronized System
Primary Chassis Display
Secondary Chassis Display
Redundancy Module
Communication Module Redundancy Module
Communication Module
PRIM
PwQS
QS
SYNC
Table 36 - Qualifying System
Primary Chassis Display
Secondary Chassis Display
Redundancy Module
Communication Module Redundancy Module
Communication Module
PRIM and QFNG
PQgS
QgS
QFNG
Table 37 - System with a Primary and Disqualified Secondary
Primary Chassis Display
192
Secondary Chassis Display
Redundancy Module
Communication Module Redundancy Module
Communication Module
PRIM
PwDS
Either:
• CMPT (modules are
compatible)
• DSNP (no partner is
present)
DISQ
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Chapter 8
Example of Qualified and Disqualified Status Indicators
This example shows status display messages and status indicators that may appear
differently depending on the qualification status of the redundant chassis. Note
that these are only two examples of many possible status display message and
indicator combinations for both the qualified and disqualified states.
Qualified Redundant Chassis
Disqualified Redundant Chassis
Primary Chassis
Primary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
Secondary Chassis
CH2 CH1 OK
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
CH2 CH1 OK
193
Chapter 8
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Check Qualification Status via the RMCT
To determine the qualification status of your system by using the RMCT, open
the RMCT and view the qualification status in the bottom-left corner of the
tool.2
194
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Conduct a Test Switchover
Chapter 8
Complete these steps to verify that your redundant system switches over as
expected. Your system must be fully-qualified before you begin.
1. In RSLinx Classic software, access the RMCT for the primary
redundancy module.
2. Click the Synchronization tab.
3. Click Initiate Switchover.
The Redundancy Configuration Tool dialog box opens.
4. Click Yes.
The switchover begins.
5. View your HMI or other status-monitoring device to verify that the
switchover was successful.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
195
Chapter 8
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Synchronization After a Switchover
TIP
If your Auto-Synchronization parameter is set to Always,
your system begins synchronizing immediately after the
switchover.
To monitor the synchronization of your system after you initiate the test
switchover, you can monitor the synchronization process by using these methods:
• Click the Synchronization Status tab and monitor the
Secondary Readiness column. The states No Partner, Disqualified,
Synchronizing, and Synchronized indicate the stages of synchronization.
• View the module status display of a primary communication module. The
states PwNS, PsDS, PwQg and PwQS indicate the stages of
synchronization.
• View the module status display of the secondary redundancy module. The
states DISQ, QFNG, and SYNC indicate the stages of synchronization.
196
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
Check the ControlNet Module
Status
Chapter 8
After you have programmed your redundant system and configured your
ControlNet network, check two statistics specific to your ControlNet modules.
These statistics include the CPU usage and the connections used.
To view the CPU usage and the number of connections used, complete these
steps.
1. In RSLinx Classic software, open the Module Statistics for the ControlNet
module.
2. Click the Connection Manager tab.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
197
Chapter 8
Monitor and Maintain an Enhanced Redundancy System
CPU Usage
The CPU usage of the ControlNet modules must be at 80%, or less. Keeping the
CPU usage below 80% reserves enough CPU functionality for the ControlNet
module to properly facilitate a switchover.
If the CPU usage is above 80%, the secondary chassis may not be able to
synchronize with the primary chassis after a switchover occurs. In addition,
unscheduled communication may be slowed.
If you need to reduce the CPU usage of your ControlNet modules, consider
making the changes described in this list:
• Increase the Network Update Time (NUT) of the ControlNet network.
• Increase the Requested Packet Interval (RPI) of your connections.
• Reduce the amount of connections through the ControlNet modules.
• Reduce the number of messages used in the program.
Connections Used
If your ControlNet modules’ connections used are near the limits of the module,
you may experience difficulty when attempting to go online with the system or
when attempting to add modules to the system.
For information about connections available with ControlNet modules, see
ControlNet Network Requirements on page 38.
Monitor the ControlNet Network
For most redundant applications, monitoring the status of the ControlNet
network is important for maintenance and troubleshooting purposes.
For programming samples to monitor the ControlNet network, visit the
Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library at http://
samplecode.rockwellautomation.com. Applicable sample programs include the
following:
• ME Faceplates for ControlNet Diagnostics
• ControlNet Connection and Media Status
198
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Chapter
9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
General Troubleshooting
Tasks
Topic
Page
General Troubleshooting Tasks
199
Check the Module Status Indicators
200
Use RSLogix 5000 Software to View Errors
201
Use the RMCT for Synchronization Attempts and Status
204
Use the RMCT Event Log
206
Keeper Status Causing Synchronize Failure
216
Partner Network Connection Lost
220
Redundancy Module Connection Lost
222
Redundancy Module Missing
223
Qualification Aborted Due to a Nonredundant Controller
225
Controller Events
226
When an error or other event occurs on the enhanced redundancy system, several
tasks can be executed to determine the cause. After an error or event, you can
perform these tasks:
• Check the module status indicators.
• View diagnostic information in RSLogix 5000 software.
• Access status and event information in the RMCT.
• Use RSLinx Classic software to view network status.
• Use RSNetWorx for ControlNet software to view ControlNet network
status.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
199
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Check the Module Status
Indicators
If an error or event occurs in the enhanced redundancy system, check the module
status indicators to determine which module is causing the error or event.
If any of the modules have status indicators that are steady or blinking red, then
examine that module status display and the RMCT or other software to
determine the cause.
Figure 58 - Steady or Flashing Red Indicators that Indicate Errors on 1756-RM2/A or 1756-RM2XT
Modules
CH2 CH1 OK
Figure 59 - Steady of Flashing Red Indicators that Indicate Errors on 1756-RM/1756-RMXT
Modules
PRI COM OK
For more information about module status indicators, see Appendix A, Status
Indicators on page 227.
Figure 60 - Module Status Displays For Chassis with 1756-L6x and 1756-L7x Controllers
1756-L6x Controller and 1756-RM Module
1756-L6x Controller and 1756-RM2/A Module
CH2 CH1 OK
PRI COM OK
1756-L7x Controller and 1756-RM Module
1756-L7x Controller and 1756-RM2/A Module
PRI COM OK
200
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
CH2 CH1 OK
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Use RSLogix 5000 Software
to View Errors
Chapter 9
To view redundancy status by using RSLogix 5000 software, complete these
steps.
1. Go online with the redundant controller.
2. Either click Primary or Secondary, depending on the controller you are
online with.
Primary
Controller
Secondary
Controller
The redundant controller ID and status are displayed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
201
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
3. If further information is required, click Controller Properties.
4. Click the Redundancy tab.
5. If controller fault details are needed, click the Major Faults and Minor
Faults tabs to view fault types and codes.
202
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
6. If necessary, reference these resources:
• Redundant Controller Major Fault Codes
• Logix5000 Controllers Major and Minor Faults programming manual,
publication 1756-PM014 (describes all major and minor fault codes)
Redundant Controller Major Fault Codes
The fault codes listed and described in this table are specific to redundant
controllers. For information about all controller major and minor fault codes, see
the Logix5000 Controllers Major and Minor Faults Programming Manual,
publication 1756-PM014.
Table 38 - Redundant Controller Major Fault Codes
Type
Code
Cause
Recovery Method
12
32
A disqualified secondary controller has had power cycled and
no partner chassis or controller was found upon powerup.
Verify that these conditions exist:
• A partner chassis is connected.
• Power is applied to both redundant chassis.
• Partnered controllers have the same:
– Catalog number
– Slot number
– Firmware revision
12
12
33
34
An unpartnered controller has been identified in in the new
primary chassis after a switchover.
Use either of these methods:
Prior to switchover, a mode switch mismatch was present. The
old primary controller was in Program mode and its secondary
partner's mode switch was in the Run position.
Instead of the switchover transitioning the new primary
controller to go to Run mode, the new primary controller
transitions to a faulted state after the switchover.
Use either of these methods:
• Remove the unpartnered controller and troubleshoot the
cause of the switchover.
• Add a partner controller to the secondary chassis,
troubleshoot the cause of the switchover, and synchronize
the system.
• Change the mode switches from Run mode to Program
mode and back to Run mode twice to clear the fault.
Make sure that the mode switch positions for both
controllers in a partnered set match.
• Use RSLogix 5000 to go online with the controllers. Then,
clear the faults and change the mode switch positions for
both the controllers in the partnered set to Run.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
203
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Use the RMCT for
Synchronization Attempts
and Status
When troubleshooting your redundant system for anomalies with qualification
and synchronization, check the Synchronization and Synchronization Status tabs
of the RMCT.
Recent Synchronization Attempts
The Synchronization tab provides a log of the last four synchronization attempts.
If a synchronization command was unsuccessful, the Recent Synchronization
Attempts log indicates a cause.
For more information about resolving the synchronization conflict, click the
attempt and view the Description in the lower box.
Figure 61 - Example of an Unsuccessful Synchronization Attempt
For more information about interpreting the Recent Synchronization attempts
log, see Recent Synchronization Attempts Log on page 118.
204
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
Module-level Synchronization Status
The Synchronization Status tab provides a module-level view of redundant
chassis and can be used to identify what module pair may be causing a
synchronization failure.
Depending on the type of synchronization failure, you may need to open the
Synchronization Status tabs for the primary and secondary redundancy modules.
• If there is a difference between major revisions of the controllers/modules,
the Compatibility column shows Undefined, as shown in this graphic.
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
19.53
• If there is a difference between minor revisions of the controllers, the
Compatibility column shows Incompatible, as shown below.
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
205
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Use the RMCT Event Log
When troubleshooting your redundant system, access the Event Log to
determine the cause of an event, error, switchover, or major fault.
Interpret Event Log Information
Use this procedure to view and interpret Event Log information.
1. Open the RMCT and click the Event Log tab.
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
2
2
206
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
2. If an event occurred, open the Event Log for both chassis (A and B).
3. Locate the Event line that shows the qualification code, start date and time
of the event, in the A chassis event log.
This is the last time the redundancy module was working properly.
Please note, multiple codes could be displayed if multiple errors occurred.
Additionally, if a secondary redundancy module is not present, then a code
may not be seen at all. See Possible Qualification Status Indicators on
page 211.
4. Then, locate the matching time entry in the B chassis event log. This will
display the disqualification code on the Event line.
Chassis A
2
2
PwQS and start date and start time in Chassis A.
This is the last time the redundancy module was
working properly.
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
Chassis B
QSwP and start date and start time in Chassis B.
This is the last time the redundancy module was
working properly, and by time, must match up
with Chassis A.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
207
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
5. Work back in time (up the lines of preceding events), to locate the point
that a switchover or disqualifying event occurred.
This is the end date and time of the event, and will be indicated on the
Event line in the A chassis event log, with a disqualification code that the
secondary has been disqualified, and a corresponding disqualification code
in the B chassis event log. Again, note that if no secondary is present, you
may not see any secondary disqualification codes in the event log at all. See
Possible Qualification Status Indicators on page 211.
Chassis A
PwDS and end date and end time in Chassis A.
This is the time the redundancy module
experienced a disqualifying event or switchover.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Preceding events that may indicate the
cause of the switchover.
Chassis B
DSwP and matching end date and end time in
Chassis B. This is the time the redundancy
module experienced a disqualifying event or
switchover.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
208
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
6. Examine the range of time in between the start of the event and the end of
the event to find the error that caused the disqualification.
IMPORTANT
Be aware that this range of time can be very large depending on how much
time has passed since the last disqualifying event.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
End
Error
2
Start
2
End
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Error
2
Start
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
209
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
You can also use the Log Time column to identify a significant event. Scan
within a time range that corresponds to the time an event was reported or
annunciated.
In addition, you can also attempt to identify events by finding differences
between times logged. Such gaps in time often identify events that require
troubleshooting. When troubleshooting by identifying gaps in the time
entries, remember that gaps in months, days, or minutes may indicate a
significant change to the system.
Not all events logged are indicative of an anomaly that needs to be
corrected. For example, events classified as Minor Faults do not warrant
corrective behavior unless they occur just before a switchover, major fault,
or state change and can be identified as contributing to successive events.
TIP
7. After you have located an event entry related to the anomaly you are
troubleshooting, double-click the event to view Extended Event
Information.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Double-click to view more information.
2
The Description provides more
information about the state change that
occurred.
No recovery method is described. This
indicates that action is not required in
response to this event.
8. View the Description and Extended Data Definitions.
The Description and Extended Data Definitions can be used to obtain
further event information and may indicate a recovery method.
210
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
Table 39 - Possible Qualification Status Indicators
Status Code
Description
PwQS
Primary with qualified (synchronized) secondary partner
QSwP
Qualified (synchronized) secondary with primary partner
DSwP
Disqualified secondary with primary partner
DSwNP
Disqualified secondary with no partner
PwDS
Primary with disqualified secondary partner
PwNS
Primary with no secondary partner
Export All Event Logs
To export event logs with the RMCT version 8.01.05, follow these steps.
1. Open the RMCT on the 1756-RM module in the primary chassis and
click the Event Log tab.
2. Click Export All.
2
2
2
2
The Export All dialog box appears.
3. Click OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
211
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
The Export Event Log configuration screen appears.
4. To change the file name or save location to something other than the
default, select the Browse button.
5. Click Export.
6. Select the 1756-RM in the secondary chassis.
In the following example, chassis A is the secondary chassis.
The primary chassis exports first.
The status displays during export.
212
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
In the following example, chassis B is the primary chassis.
The secondary chassis then exports.
In the following example, chassis A is the secondary chassis.
A confirmation dialog box displays when the export completes.
7. Click OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
213
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Export Diagnostics
IMPORTANT
Only Export Diagnostics when requested to do so by Rockwell Automation
Technical Support.
You can also click Export Diagnostics in the event of a module fault in the 1756
redundancy module. Click Export Diagnostics to collect and save diagnostic data
from the redundancy module and its partner, if an unrecoverable firmware fault
occurs. A nonrecoverable fault is indicated by a red ‘OK’ light on the front of the
redundancy module, and a fault message scrolling across the marquee display.
When you click Export Diagnostics, information is recorded that can be used by
Rockwell Automation engineering to determine the cause of the fault.
Because diagnostic information for the redundancy module and its redundancy
partner are recorded, a communication path to the partner RM is also part of the
process of obtaining the diagnostics.
Follow these steps.
1. Click Clear Fault if it is enabled, as it may first be necessary to clear any
faults before using Export Diagnostics.
2. Click Export Diagnostics.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
214
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
The Export Diagnostics dialog box appears, asking you to continue
specifying a communication path.
3. Click OK to specify the communication path via RSWho software.
The RSWho window appears.
4. Select the communication path to the partner or secondary module and
click OK.
The Export Diagnostics dialog box will appear and prompt you to specify
a location to save the export file.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
215
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
5. Name and save the export file.
6. Click Export.
It may take several minutes to export all of the data.
The Export Diagnostic Complete dialog box appears once the export has
completed.
7. Click OK.
Forward this diagnostics file to Rockwell Automation Technical Support only if
requested to do so.
Contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support
If you tried to use the event logs to troubleshoot your redundant system and are
unsuccessful, prepare to contact Rockwell Automation’s Technical Support by
exporting the event logs of both the primary and secondary redundancy
modules. The technical support representative who assists you will use those files
to help determine the cause of a switchover or other anomaly.
For more information about exporting the event logs, see Export Event Log Data
on page 124.
Keeper Status Causing
Synchronize Failure
To determine if a keeper status anomaly is causing a synchronization failure, you
can view the module status display of the ControlNet modules, or you can check
the keeper status by using RSNetWorx for ControlNet software.
TIP
216
To avoid anomalies with the Keeper Status, always reset the ControlNet
module configuration of a module being used as a replacement before
inserting and connecting the module in a ControlNet network.
For more information about resetting the ControlNet module configuration,
see Automatic Keeper Crossloads on page 102.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
Check the Module Status Display
If the module status display of the ControlNet modules in the redundant chassis
indicate these errors, you need to take corrective action:
• Keeper: Unconfigured
• Keeper: Unconfigured (data format changed)
• Keeper: Unconfigured (slot changed)
• Keeper: Unconfigured (net address changed)
• Keeper: Signature Mismatch
• Keeper: None Valid on Network
Check Keeper Status in RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software
To check the status of keepers on the ControlNet network, open RSNetWorx for
ControlNet access the Keeper Status from the Network menu.
Figure 62 - Network Keeper Status
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
217
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Valid Keepers and Signatures
This example shows a Keeper Status dialog box where the ControlNet network
that is comprised of valid keepers and signatures.
Valid Keeper Status and Signatures
Unconfigured Keeper
The example below shows the Keeper Status dialog box where a module has an
unconfigured status. Besides the status shown, the module status display indicates
Keeper: Unconfigured (node address changed).
This error results when the module’s node address has been changed. After
changing the node address, the module was used as a replacement and inserted
into the redundant chassis.
Figure 63 - Keeper Status - Unconfigured
To correct this anomaly, do one of the following:
• Select the unconfigured module and click Update Keeper.
• Reschedule the ControlNet network.
218
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
Keeper Signature Mismatch
This example shows ControlNet modules in the redundant chassis that do not
have the same keeper signatures. With this anomaly, the ControlNet module
display indicates Keeper: Signature Mismatch.
This anomaly may result if a ControlNet module configured for the same node of
another network is used to replace a ControlNet module with the same node
address in the redundant chassis.
Figure 64 - Keeper Status - Signature Mismatch
ControlNet modules in the redundant chassis
with different keeper signatures.
To correct this anomaly, do one of the following:
• Select the unconfigured module and click Update Keeper.
• Reschedule the ControlNet network.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
219
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Partner Network Connection
Lost
If a partner network connection between a redundant chassis pair is lost, a state
change or switchover may occur. These state changes may result:
• Primary with qualified secondary changes to primary with disqualified
secondary
• Qualified secondary with primary to disqualified secondary with primary
To use the Event Log to determine if a lost partner network connection caused a
state change, complete these steps.
IMPORTANT
This example shows a connection lost over a ControlNet network. You same
steps apply if the connection is lost over an EtherNet/IP network.
1. Open RSLinx Classic software and access the RMCT of the primary
redundancy module.
This is the chassis that was previously the secondary but is now the
primary.
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
2. Locate the last event that indicates successful qualification and status.
Primary Chassis
Event Log
2
2
2
2
2
A switchover is
initiated.
2
2
2
2
2
Event indicates chassis
state is as a qualified
secondary.
2
2
3. Open the Event Log for the secondary chassis because the cause of the
switchover is not apparent.
220
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
4. Use the time of the switchover event found in the primary chassis to
identify the corresponding event in the secondary chassis.
The switchover indicated in the primary chassis log occurred at 10:27:08.
Secondary Chassis Event Log
2
2
2
2
The corresponding events in the secondary chassis log indicate that the
network is not attached and that the SYS_FAIL_LActive backplane signal
is active. Both these events indicate an error in the connection of the
ControlNet module to the network.
5. Confirm the ControlNet connection error by browsing the network in
RSLinx Classic software.
73
2
This node is no longer
connected.
73
An attempt to access the
secondary RMCT fails and this
error is indicated.
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
221
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
To recover from a ControlNet network disconnection, take these actions:
• Check all ControlNet tap and trunkline connections. Correct any
disconnections or other connection anomalies.
• If the Auto-Synchronization parameter is not set to Always, use the
commands in the Synchronization tab of the RMCT to synchronize your
chassis.
For more information about troubleshooting ControlNet network anomalies, see
the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control System User Manual,
publication CNET-UM001.
To recover from a EtherNet/IP network disconnection, take these actions:
• Check all EtherNet/IP network and switch connections.
• If the Auto-Synchronization parameter is not set to Always, use the
commands in the Synchronization tab of the RMCT to synchronize your
chassis.
For more information about troubleshooting EtherNet/IP network anomalies,
see the EtherNet/IP Modules in Logix5000 Control System User Manual,
publication
ENET-UM001.
Redundancy Module
Connection Lost
To determine if the connection between the redundancy modules caused a
switchover or state change, open the Event Log of the redundancy module that is
currently the primary.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
The Event Log clearly indicates that one of the redundancy modules has been
disconnected. In addition, the dimmed secondary chassis log indicates that the
module is not connected.
222
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Chapter 9
To resolve this anomaly, check the intermodule cable that connects the
redundancy modules. Verify that it is properly connect and is not severed.
Also, if the Auto-Synchronization parameter of this system is not set to always,
use the commands in the Synchronization tab to synchronize that chassis once
the anomaly is resolved.
Redundancy Module Missing
To determine if a missing redundancy module caused a state change and
switchover, access the Event Log of the chassis that is currently the primary
chassis.
Figure 65 - Event Log with Partner RM Screamed Event
RM Screamed event indicates
module removal.
2
2
2
2
2
Last normal event
logged.
Dimmed secondary
chassis log indicates
issue with redundancy
module.
2
2
The Partner RM Screamed event is logged by the redundancy module just before
it is disconnected. Depending on cause of the missing module, the Partner RM
Screamed event may not be logged before the module is lost.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
223
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
You can also browse to the redundancy module in RSLinx Classic software to
determine if it is connected to the network. A red X over the redundancy module
indicates the module is not in the chassis.
Figure 66 - Missing Redundancy Module in RSLinx Classic Software
73
2
73
2
To correct the missing module anomaly, first verify that the redundancy module
is correctly installed in the chassis and it is properly powered. Then check the
intermodule cable that connects the redundancy modules.
After you have verified that the module is installed and powered, you may need to
synchronize the chassis by using the synchronization commands in the
Synchronization tab. Use the synchronization commands if your AutoSynchronization parameter for the chassis is not set to Always.
224
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
Qualification Aborted Due to
a Nonredundant Controller
Chapter 9
If you place a controller that is not enabled for redundancy into the redundant
chassis, the qualification and synchronization fail. To determine if your
synchronization failure is due to a nonredundant controller, complete these steps.
1. If not already open, open the RMCT of the primary module.
2. Click the Synchronization tab and view the Recent Synchronization Status
Attempts log.
The log indicates there is a Module Configuration Error.
3. Select the aborted attempt to view the description
4. Click the Synchronization Status tab to check the compatibility between
modules.
All of the modules are indicated as
being fully-compatible.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
225
Chapter 9
Troubleshoot a Redundant System
5. Open RSLogix 5000 and go online with the primary controller in your
system.
6. Open the controller properties and verify that Redundancy Enabled is
checked.
This controller is not
enabled for use in a
redundant system.
If Redundancy Enabled is not selected, then take these actions:
• Do one of the following:
–Remove the controllers that are not Redundancy Enabled.
–Enable the controller for redundancy and make other program
changes to accommodate redundancy.
• After removing or correcting the Redundancy Enabled setting, attempt
to synchronize your redundant system again.
Controller Events
Occasionally, controller-related events may be logged in the RMCT Event Log.
In some cases, the anomalies are strictly status updates and are not indicative of an
anomaly that requires troubleshooting.
In other cases, the event description may indicate Program Fault Cleared, or a
similar description of a resolved anomaly. If these types of events are not followed
by state changes or switchovers, then they are not indicative of an anomaly that
requires additional troubleshooting.
If an event logged for a controller in the redundant system is followed by a state
change or switchover, use RSLogix 5000 software to go online with the controller
and determine the cause of the fault. For more information about using RSLogix
5000 software to troubleshoot a fault, see the section titled Use RSLogix 5000
Software to View Errors on page 201.
226
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Appendix
A
Status Indicators
Redundancy Module Status
Indicators
Topic
Page
Redundancy Module Status Indicators
227
The redundancy modules have these diagnostic status indicators.
1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT Status Indicators
Figure 67 - Redundancy Module Status Indicators for 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT Modules
PR I M
CH2 CH1 OK
CH2 CH1 OK
Module Status Display
The module status display provides diagnostic information.
Table 40 - Module Status Display
Module Status Display
Description
Four-character display executing self-test at powerup.
No action necessary.
Txxx
The redundancy module is executing a self-test at powerup. (xxx represents a
hexadecimal test identification number.)
Wait for self-test to finish. No action required.
XFER
Application firmware update is in progress.
Wait for firmware update to finish. No action is required.
ERAS
Boot mode - Erasing current redundancy module firmware
PROG
Flash b mode - Updating redundancy module firmware
Wait for firmware update to finish. No action is required.
????
Resolving initial redundancy module state
Wait for state resolution to finish. No action is required.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
227
Appendix A
Status Indicators
Table 40 - Module Status Display
228
Module Status Display
Description
PRIM
Primary redundancy module.
The module is operating as the primary module. No action required.
DISQ
Disqualified secondary redundancy module.
Check the secondary partner module’s type and revision.
QFNG
Qualifying secondary redundancy module.
Redundant system status. No action is required.
SYNC
Qualified secondary redundancy module.
Redundant system status. No action is required.
LKNG
Secondary redundancy module that is in process of locking for update.
LOCK
Secondary redundancy module that is locked for update.
Exxx
Major fault has occurred (xxx represents an error or fault code, with the two leastsignificant characters in decimal).
Use the Error ID code to diagnose and address the error. For more information on error
codes, see Redundancy Module Fault Codes and Display Messages on page 233.
EEPROM Update Required
On-board EEPROM is empty.
Replace the module.
BOOT Erase Error
Error in erasing NVS device while updating boot image.
Cycle power to the module. If the error persists, replace the module.
BOOT Program Error
Error in writing in NVS device while updating boot image.
Cycle power to the module. If the error persists, replace the module.
APP Erase Error
Error in erasing NVS device while updating application image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
APP Program Error
Error in writing in NVS device while updating application image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
CONFIG Erase Error
Error in erasing NVS device while updating configuration log image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
CONFIG Program Error
Error in writing in NVS device while updating configuration log image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
EEPROM Write Error
Error in writing in EEPROM device while updating configuration log image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
Application Update Required
The module is running boot firmware. Download the application firmware obtained
from the respective redundancy bundle.
ICPT
A test line on the backplane is asserted. Check if the error message goes away after
removing each module, one at a time. If error persists, cycle power to the chassis, or
replace the chassis.
!Cpt
All modules in the chassis do not belong to the same standard or enhanced
redundancy platform.
Untrusted Certificate Error
The 1756-RM2/A and 1756-RM2XT modules use signed firmware. This error appears
when either the contents of the downloaded certificate or its signature for the
downloaded firmware is invalid.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Status Indicators
Appendix A
OK Status Indicators
The OK status indicator reveals the current redundancy module state.
Table 41 - OK Status Indicator
Indicator State
Description
Off
No power is applied to the redundancy module.
If necessary, apply power.
Solid red
One of these conditions exists:
• The redundancy module is conducting a self-test during powerup.
No action necessary.
• The redundancy module has experienced a major shutdown fault.
Cycle power to clear the fault. If the major fault does not clear, replace the module.
Flashing red
One of these conditions exists:
• The redundancy module is updating its firmware.
No action necessary.
• The redundancy module has been configured improperly.
Check the module configuration and correct any issues.
• The redundancy module has experienced a major fault that may be cleared
remotely using the RMCT.
Solid green
The redundancy module is operating normally. No action required.
Flashing green
The redundancy module is operating normally but is not communicating with the
other redundancy modules in the same chassis.
If necessary, establish communication with the other redundancy module.
CH1 and CH2 Status Indicators
The CH1 and CH2 status indicators reveal the following module states.
Table 42 - CH1 and CH2 Status Indicators
Indicator State
Description
Off
One of these conditions exists:
• No power
• RM major fault
• NVS update
Solid red
One of these conditions exists:
• No transceiver plugged in
• Faulted or failed transceiver detected
• Transceiver with incorrect or vendor ID detected
Intermittent red
For 1 s, then off, indicates powerup.
Flashing red
One of these conditions exists:
• Redundant channel error
• No cable connection
Intermittent green(1)
On for 256 ms for each packet received, then off. Active operating channel. (Channel
used for data communication between the partner 1756-RM2/A modules.)
Flashing green(1)
Indicates that this channel is operating as the back-up channel and is ready to
become the Active channel if the current Active channel fails.
Unknown
Operating state is not yet determined.
Active
Channel is operating normally as the active channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
229
Appendix A
Status Indicators
Indicator State
Description
Redundant
Channel is operating normally as the redundant channel.
Link Down
Channel is disconnected. Several causes could be:
– The cable is disconnected, broken, or damaged
– The signal is attenuated
– The connector is loose
– The partner 1756-RM2 module is powered down or in a major fault state
No SFP
No transceiver was detected. Several causes could be:
– It has failed
– It is loosely connected
– It is not installed
SFP !Cpt
The transceiver is not supported by Rockwell Automation.
SFP Fail
The transceiver is in a failed state.
(1) May be present for either CH1 or CH2, but not both at the same time.
SFP Error Message
Use only Rockwell Automation approved small form pluggable (SFP).
When an incompatible SFP is installed in the 1756-RM2/A module, the CH1/
CH2 status indicator shows solid red and the RMCT software displays the
following error message in the status bar at the bottom of the screen: ‘SFP !Cpt.’
1756-RM/A and 1756-RM/B Status Indicators
Figure 68 - Redundancy Module Status Indicators for 1756-RM and 1756-RMXT Modules
PR I M
Module Status Display
Status Indicators
PRI COM OK
PRI COM OK
Module Status Display
The module status display provides diagnostic information.
Table 43 - Module Status Display
Module Status Display
Description
Four-character display executing self-test at powerup.
No action necessary.
230
Txxx
The redundancy module is executing a self-test at powerup. (xxx represents a
hexadecimal test identification number.)
Wait for self-test to finish. No action required.
XFER
Application firmware update is in progress.
Wait for firmware update to finish. No action is required.
ERAS
Boot mode - Erasing current redundancy module firmware.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Status Indicators
Appendix A
Table 43 - Module Status Display
Module Status Display
Description
PROG
Boot mode - Updating redundancy module firmware.
Wait for firmware update to finish. No action is required.
????
Resolving initial redundancy module state.
Wait for state resolution to finish. No action is required.
PRIM
Primary redundancy module.
The module is operating as the primary module. No action required.
DISQ
Disqualified secondary redundancy module.
Check the secondary partner module’s type and revision.
QFNG
Qualifying secondary redundancy module.
Redundant system status. No action is required.
SYNC
Qualified secondary redundancy module.
Redundant system status. No action is required.
LKNG
Secondary redundancy module that is in process of locking for update.
LOCK
Secondary redundancy module that is locked for update.
Exxx
Major fault has occurred (xxx represents an error or fault code, with the two leastsignificant characters in decimal).
Use the Error ID code to diagnose and address the error. For more information on error
codes, see Redundancy Module Fault Codes and Display Messages on page 233.
EEPROM Update Required
On-board EEPROM is empty.
Replace the module.
BOOT Erase Error
Error in erasing NVS device while updating boot image.
Cycle power to the module. If the error persists, replace the module.
BOOT Program Error
Error in writing in NVS device while updating boot image.
Cycle power to the module. If the error persists, replace the module.
APP Erase Error
Error in erasing NVS device while updating application image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
APP Program Error
Error in writing in NVS device while updating application image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
CONFIG Erase Error
Error in erasing NVS device while updating configuration log image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
CONFIG Program Error
Error in writing in NVS device while updating configuration log image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
EEPROM Write Error
Error in writing in EEPROM device while updating configuration log image.
Cycle power to the redundancy module. If the error persists, replace the module.
Application Update Required
The module is running boot firmware. Download the application firmware obtained
from the respective redundancy bundle.
ICPT
A test line on the backplane is asserted. Check if the error message goes away after
removing each module, one at a time. If error persists, cycle power to the chassis, or
replace the chassis.
!Cpt
All modules in the chassis do not belong to the same standard or enhanced
redundancy platform.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
231
Appendix A
Status Indicators
OK Status Indicators
The OK status indicator reveals the current redundancy module state.
Table 44 - OK Status Indicator
Indicator State
Description
Off
No power is applied to the redundancy module.
If necessary, apply power.
Solid red
One of these conditions exists:
• The redundancy module is conducting a self-test during powerup.
No action necessary.
• The redundancy module has experienced a major fault.
Cycle power to clear the fault. If the major fault does not clear, replace the module.
Flashing red
One of these conditions exists:
• The redundancy module is updating its firmware.
No action necessary.
• The redundancy module has been configured improperly.
Check the module configuration and correct any issues.
• The redundancy module has experienced a minor failure.
Cycle power to clear the fault. If the major fault does not clear, replace the module.
Solid green
The redundancy module is operating normally. No action required.
Flashing green
The redundancy module is operating normally but is not communicating with the
other redundancy module.
If necessary, establish communication with the other redundancy module.
Communication Status Indicator
The communication status indicator indicates activity on the redundancy
module communication between chassis in the redundant chassis pair.
Table 45 - Communication Status Indicator
Indicator State
Description
Off
One of these conditions exist:
• No power is currently applied to the module.
Apply power to the module.
• There is no communication between redundancy modules in the redundant chassis
pair.
Diagnose the redundancy configuration to determine why no communication is
taking place.
232
Red < 1 second
The module has been started and has established partner communication.
No action required.
Solid red
The module has experienced a critical communication failure.
Cycle power to clear the fault. If the major fault does not clear, replace the module.
Flashing green > 250 ms
Communication activity is present.
No action required.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Status Indicators
Appendix A
Chassis State Status Indicator
The Chassis State (PRI) status indicator identifies whether the chassis is primary.
The PRI status indicator on the primary redundancy module remains solid green,
and the PRI status indicator on the secondary redundancy module remains off.
Redundancy Module Fault Codes and Display Messages
Redundancy modules may experience any of these faults.
Table 46 - Module Fault Codes
Fault Type
Description
Minor Recoverable
This fault type results in these conditions:
• The fault does not stop redundancy operations and provides you with a recovery
mechanism.
• The module may clear some minor recoverable faults on its own.
Minor Nonrecoverable
This fault type results in these conditions:
• The fault does not stop redundancy operations.
• No recovery mechanism is available.
Major Recoverable
The fault impacts redundancy operations, although the effect may not be immediate.
For example, if the fault occurred in the secondary redundancy module, the secondary
chassis will disqualify and will not be able to take over control if the primary
redundancy module fails
Major Nonrecoverable
This fault type results in these conditions:
• This is a critical fault. Redundancy operations will cease.
• A switchover may occur.
• No recover mechanism is available.
• The module may need to be replaced.
When the redundancy module experiences a fault, indication of that fault type is
presented in these methods:
• Event log
• Module Status Display
IMPORTANT
This section describes a subset of module fault codes you may see in the
event log or Module Status Display.
If you see a fault code not included in this chapter, contact Rockwell
Automation for assistance in troubleshooting that fault.
Event Log When Redundancy Module Experiences Fault
The redundancy module logs the fault type in its event log in NVS memory. You
access the event log through the RMCT to troubleshoot the fault yourself or with
assistance from Rockwell Automation Technical Support for troubleshooting the
fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
233
Appendix A
Status Indicators
Module Status Display
A character string scrolls across the Module Status Display to indicate the fault
type. The character string displays the fault type in either of these ways:
• Two to four-character word abbreviations
• Alpha numeric codes
This table describes the two to four-character word abbreviations.
Table 47 - Major Fault Code Messages
234
1st Word
2nd Word
3rd Word
CFG
LOG
ERR
Configuration log error. No action is required.
COMM
RSRC
ERR
Communication resource error. Reset the redundancy
module.
COMM
RSRC
ERR
PRT1
Port1 Communication resource error on Backplane.
Reset the redundancy module and check the chassis.
COMM
RSRC
ERR
PRT2
Port2 Communication resource error on redundancy
link. Complete these tasks:
1. Reset the module.
2. Check the cable.
COMM
ERR
PRT1
Port1 Communication error, Backplane communication.
Check or replace the chassis.
COMM
ERR
PRT2
Port2 Communication error on the redundancy link.
Check or replace the single-mode cable.
COMM
ERR
General Communication Error. No action is required.
DUPL
RM
Duplicate redundancy module. This module is not in
control. Remove this redundancy module.
EVNT
LOG
FMWR
ERR
Firmware error. Update the firmware.
HDW
ERR
Hardware failure. Replace the module.
OS
ERR
Operating system error. Replace the module.
RM
PWR
WDOG
ERR
Watchdog time out. Reset the module.
WDOG
FAIL
Watchdog task failed its status check. Replace the
module.
ERR
DOWN
4th Word
Error Description
Event Log Error. No action is required.
The redundancy module Power Down, Module detected
a DC_Fail condition.
Check the other modules in the chassis.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Status Indicators
Appendix A
Table 48 describes the alphanumeric codes.
The fault code is a four-character alphanumeric string. Valid characters are 0…9
and A through Z, except S and O. The first character is always E. Each firmware
subsystem within the redundancy module is assigned a range of fault codes. Each
subsystem assigns fault codes within its range.
Table 48 - Alphanumeric Error Codes
Valid Character String
Indication
E
Error.
x1
x2
x3
The subsystem in which the error was detected.
The subsystem function or group of functions in which the error was detected.
The specific error.
Range
Subsystem
Range
Subsystem
E 0__
Back-up Control Object
E C__
Object Communication
E 1__
OS Board Support Package
E D__
Wall Clock Time Object
E 2__
Chassis Profile Object
E E__
Non-maskable Interrupt Service
Routine
E 3__
Coordinated System Time Object
E F__
Nonvolatile Storage Object
E 4__
Device Object
E G__
RM Fault Handler
E 5__
Extended Log Object
E H__
Self Test Object
E 6__
Event Log Object
E I__
Workstation Display Object
E 7__
Back-up Communication Object
E J__
Industrial Control Platform Object
E 8__
ICP Toolkit
E K__
RM Watchdog Manager
E 9__
Indicator Device Driver
EL__
Instrumentation Object
E A__
RM State Machine
EM__
File Object
E B__
Event Log Device Driver
If you encounter one of these error codes, record the Exxx code and contact
Rockwell Automation Technical Support.
Recovery Messages
For certain faults, the module status display provides recovery instructions. Up to
four, four-character words are displayed.
Table 49 - Recover Messages
Recovery Instruction Code
Description
RPLC MOD
Replace the module.
RSET MOD
Reset the module.
REMV MOD
Remove the module.
SEAT MOD
Reinsert the module into the chassis.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
235
Appendix A
Status Indicators
Notes:
236
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Appendix
B
Event Log Descriptions
This table lists and explains some of the most-commonly experienced event
descriptions found in the Event Log of the RMCT. Use this table as a reference
when determining if an event on your system requires additional
troubleshooting.
Event Description
Description
Autoqualification trigger
Something happened that caused the system to try and synchronize again. Double-click the event to see what
happened.
Blank memories rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. Suppose that the controllers in one
chassis don't have projects while the controllers in the other chassis do have projects. In that case, the other chassis
becomes primary.
Chassis modules rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. Suppose that one chassis has more
modules than the other chassis. In that case, the chassis with the most modules gets the first chance to become primary.
It becomes primary as long as the other chassis isn't more able to control the system.
Chassis redundancy state changed to…
The chassis changed to a different redundancy state.
• PwQS — Primary with qualified (synchronized) secondary partner
• QSwP — Qualified (synchronized) secondary with primary partner
• DSwP — Disqualified secondary with primary partner
• DSwNP — Disqualified secondary with no partner
• PwDS — Primary with disqualified secondary partner
• PwNS — Primary with no secondary partner
• PLU — Primary locked for update
• SLU — Secondary locked for update
Crossloading error
A module is not able to get some information to its partner.
Disqualified secondaries rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. Suppose that the modules in one of the
chassis powered down in a disqualified secondary state. In that case, the other chassis becomes primary.
Failed modules rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. Suppose that a module in one of the
chassis is faulted but its partner module in the other chassis is not faulted. In that case, the other chassis becomes
primary.
Firmware error
The redundancy module has an anomaly.
Improper mode or mode switch position
A lock for update cannot be performed if the primary controller is faulted. A lock for update or locked switchover cannot
be performed if the mode switch on either controller is not in the REM position.
Incompatible application
A lock for update cannot be performed if the project names or applications are not identical in the primary and
secondary chassis.
Initial secondary PTP time synchronization failure
When PTP is enabled on the primary partner, the secondary partner must be PTP time synchronized as well or it will not
synchronize. The initial secondary PTP synchronization attempt may fail before the automatic retry is successful. In this
case, the event reports that initial failed attempt.
Invalid application
A lock for update cannot be performed if test edits or SFC forces exist in the application.
Module insertion
The 1756-RM now sees the module on the backplane. This means the module has either just powered up, just been put
into the chassis, or just finished resetting. Double click the event to see the slot number of the module.
Module rejected lock for update command from 1756-RM
module
A module (with a slot number specified in byte 0 of the extended status) rejected the lock-for-update command. See
events from that module to determine the cause.
Module removal
The 1756-RM no longer sees a module on the backplane. This means that the module either experienced a
nonrecoverable fault, was removed from the chassis, or was reset. Double-click the event to see the slot number of the
module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
237
Appendix B
Event Log Descriptions
Event Description
Description
Modules chassis state rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. Suppose that the modules in one chassis
are already in a primary state. In that case, that chassis becomes primary.
NRC modules rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. NRC stands for nonredundancy compliant.
Suppose that a module in one of the chassis doesn't support redundancy and all the modules in the other chassis do
support redundancy. In that case, the other chassis becomes primary.
Partner not on same link
A primary communication module cannot communicate with its partner across the network. For example, a 1756-CN2R/
B communication module in the primary chassis cannot communication with its partner 1756-CN2R/B communication
module in the secondary chassis.
These conditions may result in this event:
• A network anomaly, such as noise, a poor connection, or a termination anomaly, exists.
• The secondary communication module is not connected to the same network as the primary or any network at all.
Powerdown time rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. If the two chassis powered down more
than one second apart, the last chassis to power down gets the first chance at being primary.
Primary became PTP time synchronized
The primary module is now PTP synchronized and an auto qualification was requested.
Program Fault
A controller has a major fault.
PTP not synchronized
A redundant controller's PTP clock is not synchronized or the partner controller pair is synchronized to different
grandmasters.
PTP now synchronized
PTP is now synchronized on the module.
1756-RM OS error
The redundancy module has an anomaly.
1756-RM serial number rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. This is the final tie-breaker. The 1756-RM
with the lower serial number gets the first chance to become primary. It becomes primary as long as the other chassis
isn't more able to control the system.
Standby secondaries rule
A check to choose a primary chassis if both chassis power up at the same time. Because standby isn't available yet, this
check always ends in a tie.
SYS_FAIL_L Active
A module has a nonrecoverable fault or lost its connection to the network. When that happens, the SYS_FAIL signal
becomes true.
The backplane of the chassis has a SYS_FAIL signal. Each module in the chassis uses this signal to indicate an anomaly:
• The signal is normally false (inactive), which means that all modules in the chassis are OK.
• A module turns the SYS_FAIL signal true (active) when the module has a nonrecoverable fault or it losses its
connection to the network.
Look for later events to find out what happened:
• If you see a Module Removal event shortly afterward, then a module has a nonrecoverable fault. Double-click the
Module Removal event to see the slot number of the module. The SYS_FAIL signal may stay true until you cycle
power or remove the faulted module.
• If you see a SYS_FAIL_L Inactive event within a few hundred milliseconds, then a cable is probably disconnected or
broken. A communication module pulses the SYS_FAIL signal when the module loses its connection to the network.
Look for a Transition to Lonely event to see which module lost its connection.
The partner RM has been connected
The partner 1756-RM powered up or become connected by the fiber-optic cable.
The partner RM screamed
The partner 1756-RM lost power, has an unrecoverable fault, or was removed.
An 1756-RM has circuits that hold power long enough for it to send a message to its partner over the fiber-optic
interconnect cable. The 1756-RM sends the message even after you remove it from the chassis. This message is called a
scream. The scream lets the partner 1756-RM tell the difference between a broken fiber-optic interconnect cable and the
power loss or removal of the primary 1756-RM.
• If the fiber optic cable breaks, then there isn't a switchover.
• If the redundancy module loses power or is removed, then there is a switchover.
Transition to lonely
A communication module doesn't see any other devices on its network. This usually means that the network cable of the
module is disconnected or broken. The event log shows Transition to Not Lonely when you reconnect the cable.
Unicast not supported
A unicast connection is configured in the redundant controller, and enhanced redundancy systems do not support
Unicast.
Unknown event
The 1756-RM configuration tool may be an older version and must be updated.
WCT time change (> 1 second)
The clock of the 1756-RM changed. This happens when you:
• use the RMCT to set the clock.
• connect the redundancy module to another redundancy module that is already the primary. The redundancy module
synchronizes its clock to that of the primary 1756-RM.
238
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Appendix
C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System
or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Upgrade from a Standard
Redundancy System
Topic
Page
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System
239
Upgrade System Components
240
Upgrade Ethernet Modules When Rotary Switches Are Set between 2…254
244
Upgrade the System Software
241
Upgrade by Using Redundancy System Update
250
Replace 1756-RM/A or 1756-RM/B Redundancy Modules with 1756-RM2/A
Redundancy Modules
264
If you need to upgrade your standard redundancy system to an enhanced
redundancy system, complete this procedure.
Before You Begin
Before you begin upgrading from a standard redundancy system to an enhanced
redundancy system, consider these points:
• If the standard redundancy system uses a 1757-SRM redundancy module,
you must replace it with a 1756-RM redundancy module.
• You must upgrade all ControlNet or EtherNet/IP communication
modules.
• You must upgrade the firmware on all controllers.
• Depending on the enhanced redundancy system revision to which you are
upgrading, you may need to upgrade software.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
239
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Upgrade System Components
IMPORTANT
Safely shut down system and controlled equipment.
Be sure to place the system and controlled equipment in a state where they
can be safely shut down prior to beginning this upgrade.
The available components to which you can upgrade when converting a
standard redundancy system to an enhanced redundancy system depends
on the enhanced redundancy system revision level.
You must complete these steps when upgrading system components. Each step is
described in detail in the rest of this appendix:
• Upgrade the System Software
• Upgrade the Controllers
• Replace Communication Modules
• Steps After System Components Upgrade
Complete these steps before upgrading the necessary components to an enhanced
redundancy system.
1. Verify that the standard redundancy system is offline.
2. Remove power from both the primary and secondary chassis.
240
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
Upgrade the System Software
Upgrading your system software requires you to make many considerations and
decisions. Make sure you are fully aware of how your specific application will be
affected when you upgrade system software:
• If you are upgrading to enhanced redundancy system, revision 16.081 or
earlier, you are not required to upgrade any software.
• If you are upgrading to enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052 or
later, you must upgrade this software:
– RSLogix 5000 software
– RSLinx Enterprise communication software or RSLinx Classic
communication software, depending on which RSLinx software you
are using in the application
Due to potential changes to your application when upgrading to enhanced
redundancy system, you may need to install any of the this software:
• FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
• FactoryTalk Batch
• RSNetWorx for ControlNet
• RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP
Upgrade the Controllers
You may need to upgrade your controllers when upgrading to an enhanced
redundancy system. This table describes which controllers are available for
system upgrades.
Controllers Available in Standard
Redundancy Systems
Controllers Available in Enhanced
Redundancy Systems
1756-L61
1756-L62
1756-L63
1756-L64
All revisions
1756-L61
1756-L62
1756L63
1756-L63XT
1756-L64
Revision 19.052 or later only
1756-L65
Revision 19.053 or later only
1756-L72
1756-L73
1756-L74
1756-L75
Revision 20.054 or later only
1756-L71
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
241
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Replace Communication Modules
You must replace all communication modules when upgrading to any enhanced
redundancy system revision. You must use enhanced communication modules in
an enhanced redundancy system.
This table describes which controllers are available for system upgrades.
Communication Modules Available in
Standard Redundancy Systems
Communication Modules Available in
Enhanced Redundancy Systems
1756-CNB/D
1756-CNBR/D
1756-CNB/E
1756-CNBR/E
All revisions
1756-CN2/B
1756-CN2R/B
1756-CN2RXT/B
1756-ENBT (any series)
1756-EWEB (any series)
All revisions
1756-EN2T (any series)
1756-EN2TXT (any series)
Revision 19.052 or later only
1756-EN2TR (any series)
Revision 20.054 or later only
1756-EN2F (any series)
Replacing a 1756-EWEB Module
The 1756-EWEB communication module offers functionality that is not
available on other EtherNet/IP communication modules. When you upgrade
from a nonredundant system to an enhanced redundant system, your application
loses functionality that is available only on the 1756-EWEB communication
module.
These are examples of functionality no longer available after the conversion from
a standard redundancy system to an enhanced redundancy system:
• Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Client
• Web pages
You must account for this lost functionality in your RSLogix 5000 software
project.
Updating Communication Settings
Make sure you set all network settings, for example, node addresses or IP
addresses, required to your application in the new communication modules.
For more information on specific communication module series and firmware
revision levels required in an enhanced redundancy system, see http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/index_en.html.
242
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
Steps After System Components Upgrade
Complete these remaining steps after upgrading the necessary components to an
enhanced redundancy system
1. Apply power to the primary chassis.
2. Update and load the controller program.
IMPORTANT
If you have an existing RSLogix 5000 program for the controller, update
the program to reflect the new modules and firmware revisions.
Updates required may include changes to tags, message paths, and
controller properties, depending on your application.
3. If used, reschedule the ControlNet network.
For more information about rescheduling the ControlNet network, see
Update an Existing Scheduled Network on page 100.
4. Place the primary controller in Run mode.
5. Apply power to the secondary chassis.
If the Auto-Synchronization parameter is set to Always, the system begins
qualification and synchronization automatically.
6. If your Auto-Synchronization parameter is set at Never or Conditional
Disable, use the synchronization commands in the Synchronization tab of
the RMCT to qualify and synchronize your system.
For more information about using the synchronization commands in the
1756-RMCT module, see Commands in the Synchronization Tab on
page 117.
You have completed the steps necessary to upgrade a standard system to an
enhanced system.
IMPORTANT
Before bringing your newly-upgraded system online and into production
mode, test the system to verify that the changes made are suitable for your
application.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
243
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Upgrade Ethernet Modules
When Rotary Switches Are Set
between 2…254
This section includes the procedure to upgrade your Ethernet communication
modules when the modules rotary switches are set to 2…254 and you are unable
to interrupt the primary.
IMPORTANT
This procedure must be executed before steps 6…12 of Upgrade by Using Redundancy
System Update on page 250.
IMPORTANT
This is a change from prior releases’ upgrade procedures.
IMPORTANT
Please note, you must be physically present at the location where the redundant
chassis are located to do this upgrade.
IMPORTANT
You can only upgrade from firmware revision 19.052 or later to firmware revision
20.054. These steps apply when upgrading from firmware revision 19.052 or later to
firmware revision 20.054.
Before starting the following steps, complete steps 1…5 on page 250.
If your system is controlling a process and using rotary switches, follow these
steps.
1. Set the mode switch of the primary and secondary controllers to REM.
If the redundant controllers in both chassis of the redundant chassis pair
are not in Remote Program (REM) mode, the redundancy firmware
upgrade cannot be completed.
2. Open RSLinx Classic software and browse to the redundancy module.
3. Right-click the redundancy module and choose Module Configuration.
4. Click the Configuration tab.
244
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
5. From the Auto-Synchronization pull-down menu, choose Never.
6. Click Apply, then click Yes.
7. Click the Synchronization tab.
8. Click Disqualify Secondary, then click Yes.
The secondary chassis is disqualified as indicated by the RMCT at the
bottom-left of the RMCT and on the redundancy module’s status display.
Status in RMCT
9. Click OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
245
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
10. Make a note of the primary Ethernet module’s Port Configuration
including the following:
• IP Address
• Network Mask
• Gateway Address
11. Disconnect the Ethernet cable or cables from the secondary Ethernet
module.
12. Remove the secondary Ethernet module from the secondary chassis.
Record the original rotary switch settings, as you need to set them back
later.
Set the rotary switches to 999.
13. Reinsert the secondary Ethernet module into the secondary chassis.
14. Bridging across the backplane (or via the Ethernet module’s USB port),
configure the secondary Ethernet module’s Port Configuration to match
the primary Ethernet module’s Port Configuration from step 10.
15. Update the secondary Ethernet module to firmware revision 5.008 by
following these steps.
a. Launch ControlFLASH software and click Next.
246
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
b. Select the Ethernet module catalog number and click Next.
c. Browse to the module and select it.
Secondary Chassis
2
2
d. Click OK.
e. Select the firmware revision to upgrade to and click Next.
f. Click Finish.
The firmware begins to update. When the update is complete, the Update
status dialog box indicates completion.
Wait for the update to complete.
16. After the update completes, reconnect the Ethernet cable or cables to the
secondary Ethernet module and wait for communication to resume on the
network.
17. Repeat steps 10…16 for all Ethernet modules that have their rotary
switches set between 2…254.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
247
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
18. In RSLinx Classic software, browse in this chassis to the primary
1756-RM module.
19. Right-click to select Module Configuration to open the RMCT.
20. Click the Synchronization tab in the RMCT.
21. Click Synchronize Secondary, then click Yes.
22. After the redundant chassis pair synchronizes, click Initiate Switchover
from the Synchronization tab in the RMCT, then click Yes.
23. In RSLinx Classic software, select Module Configuration on the new
primary Ethernet communication module.
24. Click the Port Configuration tab and change the Gateway address from
0.0.0.0 to 192.168.1.1.
25. Click Apply, then click OK.
26. Disconnect the Ethernet cable or cables from the secondary Ethernet
module.
27. In ControlFLASH software, bridge across the backplane (or use the
Ethernet module’s USB port), and update the new secondary Ethernet
module to firmware revision 5.008.
When the update is complete, the Update status dialog box indicates
completion.
248
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
28. After the update completes, reconnect the Ethernet cable or cables to the
secondary Ethernet module and wait for communication to resume on the
network.
29. Repeat steps 23…28 for all Ethernet modules that have their rotary
switches set between 2…254.
30. In RSLinx Classic software, browse to the primary 1756-RM module.
31. Right-click to select Module Configuration to open the RMCT.
32. Click the Synchronization tab in the RMCT.
33. Click Synchronize Secondary, then click Yes.
34. After the redundant chassis pair synchronizes, select Initiate Switchover
from the Synchronization tab in the RMCT, then click Yes.
35. Remove the new secondary Ethernet module from the chassis and reset
the rotary switches back to their original setting from 999.
36. Reinsert the secondary Ethernet module back in the chassis and wait until
network communication resumes.
37. Repeat steps 35…36 for all Ethernet modules that have their rotary
switches set between 2…254.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
249
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Upgrade by Using Redundancy
System Update
You can upgrade an enhanced redundancy system revision to another while your
process continues to run. This is known as Redundancy System Update (RSU).
IMPORTANT
RSU is available only when upgrading from an enhanced redundancy system revision
to another. You cannot use this process to upgrade from a standard redundancy
system to an enhanced redundancy system.
IMPORTANT
Any Ethernet communication modules that have the rotary switch set must first be
updated using the Upgrade Ethernet Modules When Rotary Switches Are Set between
2…254 on page 244
IMPORTANT
You can only upgrade from firmware revision 19.052 or later to firmware revision
20.054. These steps apply when upgrading from firmware revision19.052 or later to
firmware revision 20.054.
Complete these steps to upgrade your redundancy system from one enhanced
redundancy system revision to another enhanced redundancy revision while
your process continues to run.
1. Step 1: Before You Begin
2. Step 2: Upgrade the Workstation Software
3. Step 3: Download and Install the Redundancy Firmware Bundle
4. Step 4: Upgrade the Redundancy Module Configuration Tool
5. Step 5: Add the EDS Files
6. Step 6: Prepare the Redundant Chassis for the Firmware Upgrade
7. Step 7: Upgrade the Primary Chassis Redundancy Module Firmware
8. Step 8: Upgrade the Secondary Redundancy Module Firmware and All
Other Modules’ Firmware in the Secondary Chassis
9. Step 9: Prepare the RSLogix 5000 Project for the Upgrade
10. Step 10: Lock the System and Initiate a Switchover to Upgrade
11. Step 11: Upgrade the New Secondary Chassis Firmware
12. Step 12: Synchronize the Redundant Chassis
250
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
Step 1: Before You Begin
Consider these points before you begin upgrading your enhanced redundancy
system to a new revision.
• During the upgrade procedures, you cannot use RSLogix 5000 software to
change the mode of the controller. Instead, use the mode switch on the
front of the controller.
• Leave RSNetWorx™ for ControlNet software closed or offline throughout
this procedure. If the software is open or online, you see errors in the
RSNetWorx for ControlNet software during the upgrade process.
• Remember the following when completing the tasks described in the rest
of this section:
– Do not make any changes to the RSLogix 5000 project other than
those identified in these tasks.
– Verify that no one will be or is making changes to the project.
– Do not use a FactoryTalk Batch Server to change equipment phasestates when upgrading your enhanced redundancy system.
Step 2: Upgrade the Workstation Software
Before you download and upgrade software for your redundant system, use one
of these methods to fully shut down RSLinx Classic software.
• Right-click the RSLinx Classic icon in the notification area of the screen
and choose Shutdown RSLinx Classic.
• With RSLinx Classic software open, from the File menu, choose Exit and
Shutdown.
Install the software required for your redundant system configuration. See
Software Requirements on page 49 for software versions required for use with
this enhanced redundancy system revision.
Use the installation instructions or release notes provided with each software
version for installation procedures and requirements.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
251
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Step 3: Download and Install the Redundancy Firmware Bundle
Download and install the redundancy firmware revision bundle from the
Rockwell Automation Support website at: www.rockwellautomation.com/
support/
Follow these steps.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Downloads link on the Get Support Now menu.
Click Firmware Updates under Additional Resources.
Click Control Hardware.
Click the 1756-Lxx Enhanced Redundancy Bundle file.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The Flash Firmware Updates window appears.
Enter your Serial Number.
Click Qualify For Update.
Click Finish when the Qualified For Update window appears.
Download the zipped file.
Install the Redundancy Firmware Bundle.
Step 4: Upgrade the Redundancy Module Configuration Tool
The RMCT, version 8.01.05, is included in the enhanced redundancy system,
revision 20.054_kit1 bundle. Once this bundle is installed, you can use the
RMCT, version 8.01.05.
Verify Your RMCT Version
Complete these steps to check or verify the version of the RMCT you have
installed.
1. Launch RSLinx Classic software.
2. Click RSWho.
3. Right-click your redundancy module and choose Module Configuration.
252
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
The Module Configuration dialog box opens.
4. Right-click the title bar and select About.
The About dialog box opens and indicates the RMCT version.
TIP
The RMCT launches at the version that is compatible with the redundancy module
firmware that is currently installed.
If you upgrade your RMCT version but do not upgrade your redundancy module
firmware revision compatible with the new RMCT version, the About dialog box
may not reflect the new RMCT version.
Step 5: Add the EDS Files
If needed, obtain EDS files for modules in your system from the
Rockwell Automation website at: http://www.rockwellautomation.com/
resources/eds/.
Once you have downloaded the required EDS file, launch the EDS Hardware
Configuration Tool by choosing Start > Programs > Rockwell Software >
RSLinx Tools > EDS Hardware Installation Tool.
The tool then prompts you to Add or Remove EDS files.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
253
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Step 6: Prepare the Redundant Chassis for the Firmware Upgrade
Complete these steps to prepare both the primary and secondary redundant
chassis for redundancy firmware upgrades.
1. Set the mode switch of the primary and secondary controllers to REM.
If the redundant controllers in both chassis of the redundant chassis pair
are not in Remote Program (REM) mode, the redundancy firmware
upgrade cannot be completed.
2. Open RSLinx Classic software and browse to the redundancy module.
3. Right-click the redundancy module and select Module Configuration to
open the RMCT.
4. Click the Configuration tab in the RMCT.
5. From the Auto-Synchronization pull-down menu, choose Never.
6. Click Apply, then click Yes.
254
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
7. Click the Synchronization tab.
8. Click Disqualify Secondary, then click Yes.
The secondary chassis is disqualified as indicated by the RMCT at the
bottom-left of the RMCT and on the redundancy module’s status display.
Status in RMCT
9. Click OK and close the RMCT.
Closing the RMCT helps prevent a timeout from occurring when the
redundancy module’s firmware is upgraded.
Step 7: Upgrade the Primary Chassis Redundancy Module Firmware
Wait 45 seconds before you begin updating the 1756-RM firmware. During this
time, the redundancy module conducts internal operations to prepare for an
upgrade.
1. Launch ControlFLASH software and click Next.
2. Select the redundancy module catalog number and click Next.
1756-RM/B
1756-RM2/A
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
255
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
3. Browse to the module and select it.
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
4. Click OK.
5. Select the firmware revision to upgrade to and click Next.
6. Click Finish.
The firmware begins to update. When the update is complete, the Update
status dialog box indicates completion.
Step 8: Upgrade the Secondary Redundancy Module Firmware and All Other Modules’
Firmware in the Secondary Chassis
Power on the secondary chassis. Wait 45 seconds before you begin updating the
secondary chassis firmware. During this time, the redundancy module conducts
internal operations to prepare for an upgrade.
Complete these steps to upgrade the firmware in the secondary chassis.
1. Launch ControlFLASH software and click Next.
2. Select the redundancy module catalog number and click Next.
1756-RM/B
1756-RM2/A
256
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
3. Browse to the module and select it.
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
4. Click OK.
5. Select the firmware revision to upgrade to and click Next.
6. Click Finish.
The firmware begins to update. When the update is complete, the Update
status dialog box indicates completion.
7. If you are replacing or upgrading your controller hardware, remove the
controller from the secondary chassis and replace it with the new
controller.
Use this table to determine if your planned primary and secondary
controllers can be used together in the redundant chassis.
Table 50 - Controller Compatibility
Primary Controller
Compatible Secondary Controller
1756-L61
1756-L61, 1756-L62, 1756-L63, 1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L62
1756-L62, 1756-L63, 1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L63
1756-L63, 1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L64
1756-L64, 1756-L65
1756-L65(1)
1756-L65
1756-L71
1756-L71, 1756-L72, 1756-L73, 1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L72
1756-L72, 1756-L73, 1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L73
1756-L73, 1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L74
1756-L74, 1756-L75
1756-L75
1756-L75
(1) In the ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system, revision 19.052, the ControlLogix 1756-L65 controller’s
performance differs from that of the ControlLogix 1756-L64 controller.
IMPORTANT
Controller compatibility is the same for the XT controllers as the standard controllers.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
257
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
8. Complete steps 2…7 for each module in the secondary chassis, including a
new controller, if applicable.
IMPORTANT
Ethernet communication modules that have rotary switches set must have been
previously updated using Upgrade Ethernet Modules When Rotary Switches Are Set
between 2…254 on page 244.
Once you have upgraded the firmware for each module in the secondary chassis,
prepare the RSLogix 5000 project for the upgrade.
Step 9: Prepare the RSLogix 5000 Project for the Upgrade
Complete these steps to prepare the RSLogix 5000 program and controllers for
the upgrade.
1. Launch RSLogix 5000 software and go online with the primary controller.
2. Verify that the watchdog time is set to a value that corresponds with the
requirements of the enhanced redundancy system revision and your
application.
See Minimum Value for the Watchdog Time on page 177 for information
about calculating the minimum watchdog time.
3. Cancel or assemble any pending test edits.
4. Remove all Sequential Function Chart (SFC) forces from the project.
5. Verify that no changes need to be made to the following:
– I/O forces
– I/O configuration
After this step, changes to I/O cannot be made until after the enhanced
redundancy system revision upgrade is complete and both chassis are
synchronized.
6. If you are upgrading an enhanced redundancy system, revision 16.81 or
earlier, disable CST Mastership.
7. Configure the controllers and communication modules in the redundant
chassis pair as necessary.
8. Save the project.
9. Go offline.
Controller Properties
10. Click Controller Properties.
258
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
11. Click Change Controller.
12. Specify the controller revision to which you are upgrading.
13. If you installed a new controller while upgrading the primary chassis
firmware, specify the new controller catalog number.
14. Click OK.
15. Access the Module Properties for each communication module in the
chassis and specify the module firmware revision to which you are
upgrading.
TIP
If you are unable to specify the new revision, you may need to change the
Electronic Keying parameter to Compatible Keying.
16. Save the project.
17. Download the project to the secondary controller.
The secondary controller is at the higher network address of the two
available for the redundant chassis.
18. After the download is complete, go offline.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
259
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
You are now ready to lock the system and initiate a locked switchover to update
the primary chassis. Continue with Step 10: Lock the System and Initiate a
Switchover to Upgrade.
Step 10: Lock the System and Initiate a Switchover to Upgrade
Once you have downloaded the RSLogix 5000 project you prepared, complete
these steps to lock your system and initiate a switchover.
IMPORTANT
Remain offline while completing these steps.
• Once you have locked the system, do not abort the system lock. Aborting the
system lock during this procedure clears the project from the secondary
controller.
• Do not disconnect any communication cables while completing these steps.
• Completing a locked switchover causes SFC instructions to be reset to their
initial state. This may result in SFC instructions executing twice.
1. Open the RMCT for the redundancy module in the primary chassis by
right-clicking on the RM module in RSLinx Classic software and selecting
Module Configuration.
2. Click the System Update tab.
3. Click Lock For Update, then click Yes.
4. Wait for the system to lock.
260
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
The System Update Lock Attempts log indicates when the system lock is
complete.
5. Click Initiate Locked Switchover, then click Yes.
This step results in your secondary chassis assuming control and becoming
the primary chassis. When the switchover is complete, the Locked
Switchover Attempts log indicates success.
In addition to the log, the text in chassis status row indicates the
switchover state.
Once your locked switchover is complete, upgrade the firmware revisions for
modules in the new secondary chassis.
IMPORTANT
Following the locked switchover, secondary controllers no longer contain a user
application and their configuration settings are reset to the factory-default settings.
The new secondary controllers use the default settings and the components in the
secondary chassis are upgraded and the system is synchronized.
Step 11: Upgrade the New Secondary Chassis Firmware
Complete these steps to upgrade the firmware of all of the modules in the new
secondary chassis, except for the redundancy module that was already upgraded
as described in Step 7: Upgrade the Primary Chassis Redundancy Module
Firmware on page 255.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
261
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
1. If you are replacing and upgrading your controller hardware, remove the
controller from the secondary chassis and replace it with the new
controller.
2. Launch ControlFLASH software and click Next.
3. Select the module catalog number and click Next.
4. Browse to the module and select it.
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
5. Click OK.
6. Select the firmware revision to upgrade to and click Next.
7. Click Finish.
The firmware begins to update. When the updated is complete, the
Update status dialog box indicates completion.
8. Complete steps 2 …7 for each module in the new secondary chassis,
including the new controllers, if applicable.
Once you have upgraded the firmware for each of the modules in the new
secondary chassis, continue by synchronizing the redundant chassis.
262
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Appendix C
Step 12: Synchronize the Redundant Chassis
Complete these steps to synchronize the redundant chassis after firmware in both
chassis have been upgraded to the same revision.
1. Launch the RMCT for the redundancy module in the primary chassis by
right-clicking on the module in RSLinx Classic software and selecting
Module Configuration.
2. From the Auto-Synchronization pull-down menu, choose the frequency
that suits your application.
3. Click Apply, then click Yes.
4. Synchronize the chassis.
5. Set the redundancy module date and time according to your preference.
6. Click OK.
7. Close the RMCT.
Your redundant system firmware upgrade is now complete.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
263
Appendix C
Upgrade from a Standard Redundancy System or to Another Enhanced Redundancy System
Replace 1756-RM/A or 1756RM/B Redundancy Modules
with 1756-RM2/A
Redundancy Modules
If you need to replace your current redundancy modules with 1756-RM2/A
modules, you can do so without initiating a switchover.
TIP
For the following steps, ‘redundancy’ module is used when referring to the
1756-RM/A or 1756-RM/B modules.
Before executing these steps, review the most recent Redundancy Bundle release
notes to determine the 1756-RM2 firmware revision and RMCT version needed.
You can find this information at the Product Compatibility and Download
Center at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/downloads.html.
1. Install the compatible version of the RMCT software.
You must shut down RSLinx Classic software to perform the
installation, and then restart RSLinx Classic software after the
installation is complete.
2. Set the Auto-Synchronization option in the Configuration tab of the
RMCT to Never.
3. Using the RMCT, disqualify the redundant chassis pair (if not already
disqualified).
4. Unplug the fiber cable on both of the redundancy modules.
5. Close any open RMCT sessions connected to the current redundancy
modules being replaced.
6. Remove the redundancy module pair (in any order) from the redundant
chassis.
7. Insert the 1756-RM2/A redundancy module pair (in any order) in the
redundant chassis into the same slots as the redundancy modules.
8. If not already installed, install the EDS file for the 1756-RM2/A module
by uploading it from the module by using RSLinx Classic software.
If needed, obtain the EDS file for the 1756-RM2/A module. Right
click on the module in RSWho and select ‘Upload EDS file from
device.’
9. Update to the appropriate firmware revision in the primary and secondary
1756-RM2/A modules.
10. Reconnect the fiber cable on either CH1 or CH2 of the 1756-RM2/A
redundancy module.
11. Optional: Connect a second fiber cable on the remaining channel if fiber
redundancy is desired.
12. Wait for at least 45 seconds after connecting one of the fiber cables.
13. Launch the RMCT again for the newly-installed 1756-RM2/A modules.
14. Set the Auto-Synchronization option in the Configuration tab back to the
original value or to a new desired value.
15. Using the RMCT, synchronize the system again (if it is not already
qualified).
264
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Appendix
D
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Topic
Page
Update the Configuration in RSLogix 5000 Software
266
Replace Local I/O Tags
268
Replace Aliases to Local I/O Tags
269
Remove Other Modules from the Controller Chassis
270
Add an Identical Chassis
271
Upgrade to Enhanced Redundancy Firmware
271
Update the Controller Revision and Download the Project
271
When converting from a nonredundant to a redundant system, first consider the
following:
• You can use only RSLogix 5000 software versions 16, 19, or 20 in an
enhanced redundancy system.
• The redundant chassis pair has controller, communication module and
I/O module restrictions.
See Chapter 1 for additional information.
Complete the tasks in this section to convert a nonredundant ControlLogix
system to an enhanced redundancy system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
265
Appendix D
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Update the Configuration in
RSLogix 5000 Software
These steps provide an overview of the process required to update the I/O
Configuration tree in RSLogix 5000 software.
1. If you have I/O in the chassis with the controller, add a ControlLogix
communication module to the appropriate network because I/O modules
are not permitted in a redundant chassis.
You can now move the I/O modules to the new chassis in the I/O
Configuration tree.
The I/O can be placed in
this chassis.
266
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Appendix D
2. Copy the I/O modules and paste them into the chassis of the newly-added
communication module.
Paste I/O into the new ControlNet chassis.
3. Delete the I/O modules from the controller chassis configuration.
4. Continue by completing the procedures to Replace Local I/O Tags and to
Replace Aliases to Local I/O Tags.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
267
Appendix D
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Replace Local I/O Tags
If you have moved I/O modules out of the local controller chassis and into the
remote I/O chassis, complete these steps to find and replace the local I/O tags in
your program.
1. Open the routine where the local I/O tags need to be updated.
2. Press CTRL+H to open the Replace in Routines dialog box.
3. From the Find What pull-down menu, choose Local:.
4. From the Replace With pull-down menu, choose the name of the
communication module where the remote I/O was placed.
5. From the Find Where pull-down menu, choose All Routines.
6. Click Find Within >>.
7. Select Ladder Diagrams.
8. Check Instruction Operands.
268
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Appendix D
9. Click Replace All.
The find/replace is completed and the results are indicated in the Search
Results tab.
Replace Aliases to Local
I/O Tags
If your program uses alias tags for the I/O modules that you are moving,
complete these steps to replace alias tags.
1. In RSLogix 5000 software, open the Controller Tags.
2. Press CTRL+H to open the Replace Tags dialog box.
3. From the Find What pull-down menu, choose Local:.
4. From the Replace With pull-down menu, choose the name of the
communication module where the remote I/O was placed.
5. From the Find Where pull-down menu, choose All Tags.
6. Click Find Within >>.
7. Select Alias and click Replace All.
The Search Results tab indicates the changed tags.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
269
Appendix D
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Remove Other Modules from
the Controller Chassis
If modules other than those listed below are in the controller chassis, you must
remove them. You can use these modules in ControlLogix enhanced redundancy
systems.
Table 51 - Components Available for Use in a Redundant Chassis Pair
Module type
Cat. No.
Description
Communicatio
n modules
1756-CN2/B
ControlLogix ControlNet bridge
module




1756-CN2R/B
ControlLogix redundant media
ControlNet bridge module




1756-CN2RXT ControlLogix-XT ControlNet bridge
module




1756-EN2T
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP bridge
module




1756-EN2TR
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP 2-port
module



1756-EN2TXT
ControlLogix-XT EtherNet/IP
bridge module




1756-EN2F
ControlLogix EtherNet/IP 2-port
fiber module


1756-L61,
1756-L62,
1756-L63,
1756-L64
ControlLogix controllers



1756-L63XT
ControlLogix-XT controller
ControlLogix controller



1756-L65
1756-L72,
1756-L73,
1756-L74,
1756-L75
ControlLogix controllers







Controllers
Available with Enhanced Available with
System, Revision 20.054 Enhanced System,
Revision 19.053 or
later
1756-L71
Redundancy
modules
270
1756-L73XT
ControlLogix-XT controller
1756-RM
ControlLogix redundancy module
1756-RMXT
ControlLogix-XT redundancy
module




Available with Enhanced Available with
System, Revision 19.052 Enhanced System,
or later
Revision 16.081


Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Add an Identical Chassis
Appendix D
After you have configured your primary chassis with the modules listed above,
add an identical chassis that contains the same modules with the same moduleplacement.
For more information about chassis configuration, see the section titled
Redundant Chassis on page 28.
Upgrade to Enhanced
Redundancy Firmware
Once you have made the appropriate changes to your system configuration and
program, and have added the identical chassis, upgrade your system firmware.
For information about upgrading the redundant system firmware, see Step 4:
Update Redundant Chassis Firmware on page 67.
Update the Controller
Revision and Download the
Project
After you upgrade the firmware, use RSLogix 5000 software to access the
controller properties and update the controller revision to match the redundancy
firmware revision you are using.
Once you have updated the controller firmware revision and saved the changes,
download the updated program to the controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
271
Appendix D
Convert from a Nonredundant System
Notes:
272
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Appendix
E
Redundancy Object Attributes
Use this table of redundancy object attributes as a reference when programming
to obtain the status of your redundancy system.
For this information
Get this attribute
Data
Type
GSV/SSV
Description
Redundancy status of the entire
chassis.
ChassisRedundancyState
INT
GSV
If
Then
16#2
Primary with synchronized secondary
16#3
Primary with disqualified secondary
16#4
Primary with no secondary
16#10
Primary locked for update
If
Then
16#8
Synchronized secondary
16#9
Disqualified secondary with primary
16#E
No partner
16#12
Secondary locked for update
If
Then
16#2
Primary with synchronized secondary
16#3
Primary with disqualified secondary
16#4
Primary with no secondary
16#6
Primary with synchronizing secondary
16#F
Primary locking for update.
16#10
Primary locked for update
If
Then
16#7
Synchronizing secondary
16#8
Synchronized secondary
16#9
Disqualified secondary with primary
16#E
No partner
16#11
Secondary locking for update
16#12
Secondary locked for update
If
Then
0
Undetermined
1
No compatible partner
2
Fully compatible partner
Redundancy state of the partner
chassis.
Redundancy status of the controller.
Redundancy state of the partner.
Results of the compatibility checks
with the partner controller.
PartnerChassis
RedundancyState
ModuleRedundancy State
PartnerModule
RedundancyState
CompatibilityResults
INT
INT
INT
INT
GSV
GSV
GSV
GSV
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
273
Appendix E
Redundancy Object Attributes
For this information
Get this attribute
Data
Type
GSV/SSV
Description
Status of the synchronization
(qualification) process.
Qualification InProgress
INT
GSV
If
Then
-1
Synchronization (qualification) is not in progress.
0
Unsupported
1 - 99
For modules that can measure their completion percentage, the
percent of synchronization (qualification) that is complete.
50
For modules that cannot measure their completion percentage,
synchronization (qualification) is in progress.
100
Synchronization (qualification) is complete.
If
Then
0
• The mode switches match
OR
• No partner is present.
1
Mode switches do not match
If
Then the mode switch is in
0
Unknown
1
RUN
2
PROG
3
REM
This bit
Means this minor fault
1
Power-up fault
3
IO fault
4
Problem with an instruction (program)
6
Periodic task overlap (watchdog)
9
Problem with the serial port
10
Low battery or issue with the energy storage module
If
Then
16#0
Power up
16#1
Program
16#2
Run
16#3
Test
16#4
Faulted
16#5
Run-to-program
16#6
Test-to-program
16#7
Program-to-run
16#8
Test-to-run
16#9
Run-to-test
16#A
Program-to-test
16#B
Into faulted
16#C
Faulted-to-program
Mode switch settings of the
Mode switchAlarm
controller and its partner match or do
not match.
Position of the mode switchmode
switch of the partner.
Status of the minor faults of the
partner (if the
ModuleRedundancyState indicates
that a partner is present).
Mode of the partner.
274
Partnermode switch
PartnerMinorFaults
PartnerMode
DINT
DINT
DINT
DINT
GSV
GSV
GSV
GSV
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Redundancy Object Attributes
For this information
Get this attribute
Data
Type
GSV/SSV
Description
In a pair of redundant chassis,
identification of a specific chassis
without regard to the state of the
chassis.
PhysicalChassisID
INT
GSV
If
Then
0
Unknown
1
Chassis A
2
Chassis B
Appendix E
Slot number of the 1756-RM module
in this chassis.
1756-RM SlotNumber
INT
GSV
• Size of the last crossload.
• Size of the last crossload if you
had a secondary chassis.
LastDataTransfer Size
DINT
GSV
This attribute gives the size of data that was or would have been crossloaded in the
last scan in the number of DINT’s (4-byte words).
The secondary chassis does not have to be connected or online. If you do not have a
secondary chassis, the number of DINT’s that would have been crossloaded are
indicated.
• Size of the biggest crossload.
• Size of the biggest crossload if you
had a secondary chassis.
MaxDataTransfer Size
DINT
GSV
SSV
This attribute gives the biggest size of the LastDataTransfer Size attribute in DINTs
(4-byte words).
The secondary chassis does not have to be connected or online. If you do not have a
secondary chassis, the largest number of DINTs that would have been crossloaded
are indicated.
If you need to reset this value, use an SSV instruction with a Source value of 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
275
Appendix E
Redundancy Object Attributes
Notes:
276
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Appendix
F
Enhanced Redundancy System Checklists
Topic
Page
Chassis Configuration Checklist
277
Remote I/O Checklist
278
Redundancy Module Checklist
278
ControlLogix Controller Checklist
279
ControlNet Checklist
279
EtherNet/IP Module Checklist
280
Project and Programming Checklist
281
Chassis Configuration Checklist

Requirement
Chassis used for the redundant pair are the same size, for example, both are 1756-A7, 7-slot chassis.
Only these modules are used in the redundant chassis:
• ControlLogix controllers, catalog numbers 1756-L61, 1756-L62, 1756-L63, 1756-L63XT,1756-L64, 1756-L65, 1756-L71, 1756-L72, 1756-L73, 1756-L73XT, 1756-L74,
1756-L75
• ControlNet communication modules, catalog numbers 1756-CN2/B, 1756-CN2R/B, 1756-CN2RXT
• EtherNet/IP communication modules, catalog numbers 1756-EN2T,1756-EN2TXT, 1756-EN2TR, 1756-EN2F
• Redundancy modules, catalog numbers 1756-RM, 1756-RMXT, 1756-RM2/A, 1756-RM2XT
Each chassis of the pair is comprised of identical modules that are of identical redundancy firmware revisions, series, and memory sizes.(1)
Partner modules are placed in same slots of both chassis of the redundant pair (for example, the 1756-L63 is placed in slot 0 of both chassis).
I/O modules are not placed in the redundant chassis.
Seven or fewer communication modules of any type or combination are used in each redundant chassis.
(1) There are some exceptions to this requirement. For more information, see Redundant Chassis on page 28.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
277
Appendix F
Enhanced Redundancy System Checklists
Remote I/O Checklist

Requirement
I/O is not placed in redundant chassis.
I/O is connected to the redundant chassis by using one of these networking options:
• ControlNet connections to the same ControlNet network as the redundant controller chassis, without bridging.
• EtherNet/IP connections to the same EtherNet/IP network as the redundant controller chassis, without bridging. If in the I/O tree of the redundancy controller, all I/O
and consumed tag connections must be multicast connections. The I/O tree of the redundancy controller may contain produced unicast tags consumed by remote
users.
• A DeviceNet network connected through a 1756-DNB DeviceNet communication module in a remote, that is, nonredundant, chassis.
• A universal remote I/O or Data Highway Plus network connected through the use of a 1756-DHRIO module in a remote (nonredundant) chassis.
Redundancy Module Checklist

Requirement
One redundancy module is placed in the same slot of each redundant chassis.
Series A and B redundancy modules are fully compatible. Therefore, you can use any combination of them in a partnered set, for example, a 1756-RM/A module in the
primary chassis and a 1756-RM/B module in the secondary chassis. However, the best scan performance occurs when two Series B redundancy modules are used with
1756-L7x controllers.
IMPORTANT
The scan time is slightly extended when you downgrade a Series B redundancy module to a Series A module in conjunction with a 1756-L7x
controller in the redundant chassis pair. In this case, raise the task watchdog limits by a factor of ~2x before downgrading. Thereafter, you can retune the limits based on the updated scan time numbers.
If your application uses 1756-L6x controllers in the redundant chassis pair, using a combination of Series A and Series B redundancy modules
results in the same performance as if you use only a Series A redundancy module in the redundancy chassis pair, regardless of the primary or
secondary redundancy state.
A fiber-optic cable connects the redundancy modules in the redundant chassis pair. These are catalog numbers of fiber-optic cable you can order from Rockwell
Automation:
• 1756-RMC1 (1 m, 3.28 ft)
• 1756-RMC3 (3 m, 9.84 ft)
• 1756-RMC10 (10 m, 32.81 ft)
If necessary, you can make your own fiber-optic cable that is up to 4 km (13,123.36 ft) for the 1756-RM/B module or 10 km (32,808.40 ft) for the 1756-RM2 module.
278
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Enhanced Redundancy System Checklists
Appendix F
ControlLogix Controller Checklist

Requirement
Identical ControlLogix controllers are placed in the same slot of both chassis of the redundant pair.
Partnered controllers are identical in redundancy firmware revision, and memory size.
Within each redundant chassis, one or two (maximum) of these controllers are used:
• 1756-L61, 1756-L62, 1756-L63, 1756-L63XT, 1756-L64(1), 1756-L65
• 1756-L71, 1756-L72, 1756-L73, 1756-L73XT, 1756-L74, 1756-L75
Do not combine 1756-L6x and 1756-L7x controllers in a redundant chassis.
Each controller in the redundancy chassis has enough memory to store twice the amount of controller data and I/O memory. (See Knowledgebase ID 28972 for more
information.)
Eight controller connections are reserved for redundancy use.
(1) When using ControlLogix enhanced redundancy system, revision 16.081 or earlier, you cannot use two 1756-L64 controllers in the same chassis. You can, however, use a 1756-L64 controller in the same
chassis as a 1756-L61, 1756-L62, or 1756-L63 controller.
ControlNet Checklist

Requirement
ControlNet Module
Identical ControlNet modules are placed in the same slot of both chassis of the redundant pair.
ControlNet modules are identical in redundancy firmware revision and in series.
Only the 1756-CN2/B, 1756-CN2R/B, or 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet modules are used.
Partnered ControlNet modules both have identical keeper information as explained in the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual, publication
CNET-UM001.
Three connections of the ControlNet module are appropriately reserved for redundancy system use.
ControlNet Network
USB ports of communication modules in the redundant chassis are not used while the system is running (online).
At least four ControlNet nodes are used on the ControlNet network. That is, at least two ControlNet nodes are on the ControlNet network in addition to the two ControlNet
modules in the redundant chassis.
These requirements apply to at least one ControlNet node:
• It is not in the redundant chassis pair.
• It uses a node address lower than the ControlNet node addresses of modules in redundant chassis pair.
These requirements apply to all ControlNet communication modules available in an enhanced redundancy systems.
ControlNet module partners in the redundant chassis have the following:
• Node address switches set to the same address (for example, both modules’ switches are set to node address 13).
• Two consecutive node addresses reserved (for example, nodes 13 and 14) to accommodate a switchover. The primary ControlNet module can have an even or oddnumbered node address.
The ControlNet network is scheduled by using techniques described in the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual, publication CNET-UM001.(1)
Devices on other communication networks are bridged to the ControlNet network appropriately.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
279
Appendix F

Enhanced Redundancy System Checklists
Requirement
ControlNet HMI
A ControlNet network or a ControlNet-to-EtherNet/IP gateway is used to connect to HMI because your system requires that HMI be updated immediately after a
switchover.
• PanelView Standard terminal, PanelView 1000e or 1400e terminal
For an unscheduled network, 4 HMI terminals per controller are used.
For a scheduled network, any amount of terminals within the limits of the ControlNet network are used.
• PanelView Plus terminal, VersaView industrial computer running a Windows CE operating system
RSLinx Enterprise software, version 5.0 or later, is used.
Within each controller and communication module, five connections for each PanelView Plus or VersaView terminal are reserved.
• FactoryTalk View SE software with RSLinx communication software, version 2.52 or later, RSView® 32 software, RSLinx Enterprise software, version 5.0
The number of RSLinx servers that a controller uses is limited to 1…4 (maximum).
(1) Unscheduled ControlNet networks can be used, however, certain use considerations must be made. See Chapter 5, Configure the ControlNet Network on page 93.
EtherNet/IP Module Checklist

Requirement
EtherNet/IP Module
Identical EtherNet/IP communication modules are placed in the same slot of both chassis of the redundant chassis pair.
EtherNet/IP communication modules are one of these catalog numbers:
• 1756-EN2T, 1756-EN2TXT, 1756-EN2TR, 1756-EN2F
EtherNet/IP Network
With firmware revision 19.052 and later, you can use an EtherNet/IP network for I/O and produced/consumed tags.
With firmware revisions 16.081 and earlier, an EtherNet/IP network does not support I/O or produced/consumed tags.
Enhanced redundancy systems support unicast produced tags. Unicast consumed tags are not supported in enhanced redundancy systems.
USB ports of communication modules in the redundant chassis are not used while the system is running (online).
IP addresses of devices on the EtherNet/IP network are static and IP address swapping is enabled.(1)
280
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Enhanced Redundancy System Checklists

Appendix F
Requirement
EtherNet/IP HMI
HMI Blind Time is the time during a switchover from primary to secondary, when tag data from the controller is unavailable for reading or writing. See HMI Blind Time
Reduction on Ethernet During a Switchover on page 21.
IMPORTANT: This feature requires RSLinx Enterprise software, version 5.50.04 or later.
• PanelView Standard terminal
None (the use of the PanelView Standard terminal in a redundant system requires the same considerations as a nonredundant system).
• PanelView Plus terminal, VersaView industrial computer running a Windows CE operating system
RSLinx Enterprise software, version 3.0 or later, is used.
Within each of the controllers and communication modules, five connections for each PanelView Plus or VersaView terminal are reserved.
• FactoryTalk View SE software with RSLinx Enterprise software
RSLinx Enterprise software, version 3.0 or later is used.
IP address swapping is used.
HMI and both redundant chassis are on the same subnet.
• FactoryTalk View SE software with RSLinx software, version 2.x, RSView® 32 software, Any other HMI client software that uses RSLinx software, version 2.x
The number of RSLinx servers that a controller uses is limited to 1…4 (maximum).
(1) Other IP address configurations are permitted, but require additional considerations. For more information, see Use IP Address Swapping on page 77.
Project and Programming Checklist
In addition to the checklist below, see the ControlLogix Controller Checklist on
page 279.

Requirement
The Redundancy Module Date and Time has been set by using the RMCT.
One project is created by using RSLogix 5000 software and is downloaded to the primary controller.(1)
Redundancy is enabled within the Redundancy tab of the Controller Properties dialog box.
Task configuration is either:
• One continuous task within the project.
or
• Multiple periodic tasks with only one task at the highest priority. Also, multiple tasks are structured so that the fewest possible separate tasks are used.
The redundant controller program does not contain:
• Event tasks.
• Inhibited tasks.
Programming specific to critical I/O that must be bumpless is placed in the highest-priority user task according to your task configuration.
If you use this task structure
Then programming specific to bumpless I/O is in
One continuous task
The continuous task.
One continuous task and one or more periodic tasks
The highest-priority periodic task where only that one task is at the
highest priority.
Multiple periodic tasks
The highest-priority periodic task where only that one task is at the
highest priority.
For 1756-L6x controllers, the task watchdog is (2 * maximum_scan_time) + 150 ms when using ControlNet I/O and (2* maximum_scan_time) + 100 ms when using
Ethernet I/O, where maximum_scan_time is the maximum scan time for the entire task to complete when the redundant controllers are synchronized.
To calculate watchdog time for 1756-L7x controllers, see Minimum Value for the Watchdog Time on page 177.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
281
Appendix F

Enhanced Redundancy System Checklists
Requirement
Scan time is minimized by using these techniques when possible:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unused tags are eliminated.
Arrays and user-defined data types are used instead of individual tags.
Redundancy data is synchronized at strategic points by using the Synchronize Data after Execution setting in the Program Properties dialog box.
Programming is written as compactly and efficiently as possible.
Programs are executed only when necessary.
Data is grouped according to frequency of use.
DINT tags are used instead of SINT or INT tags.
For produced/consumed data, the communication module in the remote chassis that holds the consuming controller uses the Comm Format: None.
Critical messages from a remote chassis to redundant chassis use cached connections.
Active tags on scan per controller are less than 10,000 tags/second.
(1) Note that the project loaded on the primary controller is automatically crossloaded to the secondary controller when sychronization occurs.
282
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Appendix
G
Enhanced Redundancy Revision History
Changes to This Manual
With the availability of new controllers, modules, applications, and
RSLogix 5000 software features, this manual has been revised to include updated
information. This appendix briefly summarizes changes that have been made with
each revision of this manual.
Reference this appendix if you need information to determine what changes have
been made across multiple revisions. This may be especially useful if you are
deciding to upgrade your hardware or software based on information added with
previous revisions of this manual.
This table lists the publication revision, publication date, and changes made with
the revision.
Table 52 - History of Changes
Publication Revision and Date
Topic
1756-UM535C-EN-P, July 2012
Updated features not supported
Addend information about using signed and unsigned firmware
Updated I/O modules in enhanced redundancy systems-revision 19.053 to the
header for remote I/O module placement
Added HMI Blind Time reduction on an EtherNet/IP network during a switchover
Added information about enhanced communication modules and unicast
connections
Added restrictions when using firmware revision 19.052 versus 19.053
Added the 1756-L71, 1756-L73XT controllers, 1756-EN2F module, and 1756-A7XT
chassis to the table of components available for use in a redundant chassis pair
Listed power supplies available for a redundant chassis pair
Corrected revision 19.052 to 19.053
Added ‘or later’ to revision 19.052 here, and throughout the manual
Added ‘or later’ to revision 19.052 here, and throughout the manual, and chassis
size to configuration requirements
Added 1756-L71 controller for controller compatibility and updated revision
information
Rearranged EtherNet/IP and ControlNet networks sections; added 1756-EN2F
module information
Added remote chassis access restrictions using an EtherNet/IP network; added ‘or
later’ to revision 19.052
Added unicast functionality
Added information about using a remote chassis access using a ControlNet
network
Added additional information about 1715 Redundant I/O Systems
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
283
Appendix G
Enhanced Redundancy Revision History
Publication Revision and Date
Topic
Added firmware requirements for revisions 20.054 and 19.053Enh
Added information to enhanced redundancy module quick start
Added EDS files information
Added communication module installation and1756-EN2F module information
Updated controller installation information
Updated redundancy module installation
Updated fiber-optic communication cable connection
Updated chassis firmware information
Updated information on designating a primary and secondary chassis
Updated information about conversion between nonredundant and redundant
system
Updated information to reset the redundant module
Updated information on removing or replacing the redundant module
Updated information about RPI being the same as a nonredundant chassis when
using firmware revision 20.054 or later, and CPU usage information for Ethernet/IP
communication modules
Added information about unicast functionality in enhanced redundancy system
remote controller
Added socket support for the 1756-EN2F module for firmware revision 5.008 or
later, and Unicast functionality with produced/consumed tags
Updated information about downloading firmware bundle and determining RMCT
version
Updated information about 1756-L7x controller crossload time
Added information about secured module mismatch
Changed firmware revision information
Updated MSG instructions information
Updated minimum value for the Watchdog Time
Changed firmware revision information
Added memory usage slider
Updated information for event log update
Added information for Export diagnostics button
Added 1756-L71 controller information
Added 1756-EN2F module information
Added how to upgrade Ethernet modules when rotary switches are set between
2…254
Added how to upgrade from an enhanced redundancy system to another by using
RSU
Added software version 20 for an enhanced redundancy system
Updated chassis configuration list to include 1756-L71 controller and 1756-EN2F
communication module
Updated information about produced unicast tags
Updated information about I/O and multicast connections
Updated controller checklist to add 1756-L71 controller
Updated Watchdog time information
284
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Enhanced Redundancy Revision History
Publication Revision and Date
Topic
1756-UM535B-EN-P, December
2010
Updates to EtherNet/IP network use in enhanced redundancy systems
Appendix G
Support for 1756-A4LXT to chassis
Support for 1756-L65 controller
Support for 1756-L7x controllers(1)
Improved scan time with 1756-L7x controllers when compared to the scan time
with 1756-L6x controllers
Corrected MSG attribute value to set the date and time for a 1756-RM redundancy
module
Support for Partial Import online
Support for controller logging
Updated status indicator information
Updated system checklists
(1) Subsequent to revision B of this manual’s release, the revision 19.052 firmware was replaced with revision 19.053 firmware for the
1756-L7x controllers.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
285
Appendix G
Enhanced Redundancy Revision History
Notes:
286
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Index
Numerics
1715 Redundant I/O systems 16, 18, 35, 44
1756-A7XT 24
1756-CN2/B 56
1756-CN2R/B 56
1756-CN2RXT 56
1756-CN2x modules 32
1756-EN2F 24, 242
1756-EN2T 56
sockets 85
1756-EN2TR 56
sockets 85
1756-EN2Tx modules 32
1756-EN2TXT 56
1756-L6x 279
1756-L6x controller 29
1756-L7x 30, 185, 279
1756-RM2/A 152
1756-L7x controller 29
1756-L7xXT 25
1756-RM
status indicators 200
1756-RM and 1756-RMXT modules 31
1756-RM2/A 24, 57, 61
1756-L7x 152
compatible revisions 24
crossload 151
dual fiber ports 138
restrictions 22
RMCT 54
status indicators 200, 227
1756-RM2XT/A 24, 57, 61
compatible revisions 24
restrictions 22
status indicators 227
A
Array (File)/Shift instructions 159
Auto-Synchronization 114
B
beacon 88
BOOTP/DHCP utility 86
C
calculate
task watchdog 177
CH1
status indicators 229
CH2
status indicators 229
chassis 52, 55
designate 71
ID 115
install 54, 55
module placement 54
primary 19
redundant 24
secondary 19
chassis configuration list 277
CIP Sync technology 16, 35, 81-83
clearing a fault 129
communication
EtherNet/IP delay 36
module connections 33
modules 32
communication module 52
replace 242
unicast 22
compatibility
controller 30
compatible revisions
1756-RM2/A 24
1756-RM2XT/A 24
components
enhanced redundancy system 24
overview 17
upgrade 240
concise, program 157
configuration
controller 141
EtherNet/IP modules 85
HMI 46
remote I/O 44
RMCT
determine if needed 106
software 49
Configuration tab 113-115
connections
communication 33
controller 31
fiber-optic cable 63
continuous task
execution 145
recommended 145
ControlFLASH 52, 69
controller 29
compatibility 30
configure redundancy 141
connections 31
differences between 1756-L6x and 1756-L7x
controllers 29
enable user program 115
event in Event Log 226
installation 56
save project 102
status 201
troubleshoot
nonredundant 225
use multiple 152
controller logging 189
controllers 25
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
287
Index
ControlNet
CPU usage 198
keeper crossload 102
keeper status 101
module
check status 197
monitor CPU usage 198
network update time 95
node requirements 38-40
overview 38-??
produce/consume connections 93
redundant media 41
remote I/O 18
requirements 38-??
sample programs 198
schedule
existing network 100
new network 98
troubleshoot
keeper status 216
lost connection 220
unscheduled 97
ControlNet communication modules 56
conversion
nonredundant to redundant 73
convert
nonredundant to redundant 265-271
CPU usage
Ethernet/IP 77
crossload 57
1756-RM2/A 151
ControlNet keepers 102
default 145
estimate 149
redundancy object attributes 150
redundant system 19
scan time 149
D
Data Highway Plus 43
date and time 115
designate
primary chassis 71
designation
chassis 71
conduct 19
qualification after 73
device-level ring network 35, 87
beacon interval 88
beacon timeout 88
DeviceNet 43
DLR
ring node 88
supervisor node 87
DSwNP
qualification status indicators 211
DSwP
qualification status indicators 211
dual fiber ports
1756-RM2/A 138
duplex setting 86
288
E
edit system event 137
EDS files 54
electrostatic discharge 58
elements of DLR network 87
enable
user program control 115
enhanced redundancy system
chassis 28
communication modules 32
components 17, 24
controllers 29
features 16
operations 19
power supply 34
quick start 51
redundancy modules 31
redundant power supplies 34
restrictions 22
using ControlNet 38-??
using EtherNet/IP 35-37
environmental considerations 51
Ethernet 52
HMI blind time 21
EtherNet/IP
1715 Redundant I/O systems 16
configure module 85
delay 36
device-level ring network 35
duplex setting 86
features available in system revision 19.052
only 35
IP address swapping 36, 77-79
modules 24
overview 42
produce/consume connections 35, 84
remote I/O 16, 18
requested packet interval 77
requirements 42
set address 86
troubleshoot
lost connection 220
use of CIP Sync technology 35, 81-83
with HMI 46
Ethernet/IP
CPU usage 77
EtherNet/IP communication modules 56
event classification 121
Event Log
controller event 226
qualification events 74
RMCT 206
Event Log tab 120-129
clearing a fault 129
event classifications 121
export data for all events 127-128
export single event data 124-126
extended event information 123
execution
continuous task 145
periodic task 147
export data for a single event 124-126
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Index
export data for all events 127-128
export diagnostics button 214
export event log 124-128
extended event information 123
F
FactoryTalk software 16
features
available in system revision 19.052 only 35
fiber-optic cable 67
connect 63
redundancy channels 65
fiber-optic communication cable 52
firmware 67
bundles 49
download 54
revision 49
signed and unsigned 17
update 67-71
firmware bundle 51
flash upgrade 67
H
hardware
install 54
HMI blind time
Ethernet 21
Human-Machine-Interface (HMI) 46-48
use over ControlNet 47
use over EtherNet/IP 46
I
I/O
1715 Redundant I/O systems 16, 35, 44
in enhanced redundancy system revisions 18
multicast 278
over EtherNet/IP network 16
placement 18, 44
install
chassis 55
communication modules 56
controller 56
hardware 52, 54
power supply 54, 55
primary chassis 54-62
redundancy module 57
secondary chassis 63
software 53
installation instructions 62
IP address 52
BOOTP/DHCP utility 86
consecutive 78
plan 85
RSLinx communication software 86
RSLogix 5000 software 86
set 86
swap 78
swapping 36, 77-79
switches 86
K
keeper
crossloads 102
status 101
mismatch 219
module status display 217
RSNetWorx for ControlNet software 217
unconfigured 218
valid 218
troubleshoot 216
L
laser radiation ports 60
log
Recent Synchronization Attempts 117
System Event History 136
logic, scan-dependent 160
M
memory usage slider 185
1756-L7x 185
mode switch
REM 68
Module Info tab 111-112
module placement
chassis 54
module status display 192
monitor
ControlNet
sample programs 198
motion
unsupported feature 17
MSG instruction 173
multicast
I/O 278
N
network 97
ControlNet
monitor CPU usage 198
overview 38-??
Data Highway Plus 43
device-level ring 35, 87
DeviceNet 42, 43
EtherNet/IP 42
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
289
Index
overview 35-37
keeper 101
keeper crossload 102
Remote I/O 42
schedule
existing 100
new 98
Universal Remote I/O 43
update time 95
network update time 95
nonredundant controller 225
nonredundant to redundant
conversion 73
nonredundant, convert from 265-271
O
online edits 182-188
finalize 186
reserve memory 187
retain edits 184
test edits 183
operations
chassis designation 19
crossload 19
enhanced redundancy system 19
qualification 19
switchover 19
synchronization 19
optical ports 59
scan time 149
enable user control 115
finalize test edits 186
logic after switchover 170
maintain data integrity 159-162
manage tags 154
messages for redundancy commands 171175
monitor system status 190
obtain system status 168
online edits 182-188
optimize task execution 163-168
Partial Import Online 182
periodic task 167
reserve memory 187
scan time
minimize 152-158
synchronization
default 145
system overhead time slice 164
tags 154
task type 145
test edits 183
use concise 157
project
save 102
PsDS
qualification status indicators 211
PwNS
qualifcation status indicators 211
PwQS
qualification status indicators 211
P
Partial Import Online 182
periodic task 167
execution 147
recommended 145
power supplies 55
power supply 25, 34, 52
install 54, 55
redundant power supplies 34
primary 246
primary chassis 19
designate 71
designation 71-74
installation 54-62
produce/consume connections
over ControlNet 93
over EtherNet/IP 35, 84
produced tags
unicast 85
program
crossload
default 145
Q
QSwP
qualification status indicators 211
qualification
after designation 73
check in RMCT 194
check status 192
description of 19
status via RMCT 74
troubleshoot
nonredundant controller 225
qualification status indicators 211
DSwNP 211
DSwP 211
PwDS 211
PwNS 211
PwQS 211
QSwP 211
qualify
redundant module 74
quick start
enhanced redundancy system 51
R
Recent Synchronization Attempts log 117
redundancy channels
fiber-optic cable 65
290
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Index
redundancy firmware
bundles
bundles
redundancy firmware
252
redundancy module 31, 52
connect via fiber-optic cable 63
date and time 115
info 111-112
install 57
lost connection between modules 222
status indicators 227
troubleshoot
missing 223
Redundancy Module Configuration Tab
qualification
status 74
Redundancy Module Configuration Tool 49,
105
additional configuration 106
check qualification 194
Configuration tab 113-115
Event Log tab 120-129
identify version 109
install 54
Module Info tab 111-112
open 107
Synchronization Status tab 119
Synchronization tab 116-119
System Event History tab 136
System Update tab 130-135
update 110
upgrade 252
redundancy modules
replace 20, 264
redundancy object attributes
for crossload time 150
redundancy system update
RSU 250
redundant chassis 24
designate 71
example 26, 27
redundant fiber cable 64
redundant fiber ports
single point of failure 16
redundant media
ControlNet 41
redundant module
qualify 74
remove 75
replace 75
reset 75
REM
mode switch 68
remote
1715 Redundant I/O systems 35, 44
communication modules 43
I/O 16
ControlNet 18
EtherNet/IP 18, 35
placement 44
remote controller
unicast 84
remove
redundant module 75
replace
redundancy modules 20, 264
redundant module 75
replace communication module 242
requested packet interval
over EtherNet/IP 77
requirements 49
ControlNet 38-??
EtherNet/IP 42
firmware 49
reset
redundant module 75
restrictions 22
1756-RM2/A 22
1756-RM2XT/A 22
enhanced redundancy system 22
revisions 241
ring node
DLR 88
RIUP 58
RMCT 51, 105
1756-RM2/A 54
Event Log 206
troubleshoot 206
version 109
RMCT. See Redundancy Module Configuration
Tool.
rotary switches 244
RSLinx Classic 51, 251
shutdown 53
RSLinx communication software 49, 53, 86
RSLogix 5000 software 51, 86
use to troubleshoot 201
RSU
redundancy system update 250
S
scan time
best performance 152
concise programming 157
crossload 149
efficient crossloads 154-156
minimize 152-158
multiple controllers 152
number of programs 153
scan-dependent logic 160
schedule
ControlNet 98
secondary 246
secondary chassis 19
designation 71-74
intallation 63
set IP address 86
SFP 230
small form pluggable 67
transceiver 67
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
291
Index
shutdown
RSLinx Classic 53
signed and unsigned
firmware 17
SIL3
unsupported feature 17
single point of failure
redundant fiber ports 16
small form pluggable
SFP 67
sockets
1756-EN2T 85
1756-EN2TR 85
software 49
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events 50
FactoryTalk Batch 50
FactoryTalk View Site Edition 50
install 53
optional 50
Redundancy Module Configuration Tool 49
required 49
RSLinx communication software 49, 53, 86
RSLogix 5000 software 86
RSNetWorx for ControlNet 50
RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP 50
RSView32 50
upgrade 241, 251
status
of qualification 74
via module status display 192
status indicators
1756-RM 200
1756-RM2/A 200, 227
1756-RM2XT/A 227
CH1 229
CH2 229
redundancy module 227
use to troubleshoot 200
subnet 78
supervisor node
DLR 87
switchover 19
description 20
example 133
locked attempts 135
logic after 170
monitor synchronization after 196
test 195
synchronization
automatic
synchronization 114
default 145
description of 19
monitor after switchover 196
Synchronization Status tab 119
Synchronization tab 116-119
attempts log 117
commands in 117
system
qualification, system
synchronization 19
system conversion 265
292
system event
edit comment 137
save history 137
System Event History tab 136
system overhead time slice 166
optimize program 164
System Update commands
abort system lock 132
initiate locked switchover 133
lock for update 131
System Update Lock Attempts 134
System Update tab 130-135
commands 131-133
Locked Switchover Attempts 135
System Update Lock Attempts 134
T
tags
manage 154
task 147
continuous, execution 145
optimize execution 163-168
periodic 167
recommended 145
time and date 115
transceiver
SFP 67
troubleshoot 199-226
check status indicators 200
controller event 226
EtherNet/IP
lost connection 220
lost EtherNet/IP connection 220
missing redundancy module 223
qualification abort 225
redundancy module
lost connection 222
missing 223
RMCT 206
synchronization
keeper status 216
use
RSLogix 5000 software 201
RSNetWorx for ControlNet software 217
U
unicast
communication module 22
produced tags 85
remote controller 84
Universal Remote I/O 43
unscheduled
ControlNet network 97
unsupported feature
motion 17
SIL3 17
update
RMCT 110
system commands 131-133
update firmware 52
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Index
upgrade
components 240
firmware 67-71
Redundancy Module Configuration Tool 252
software 251
user comment 137
user program control 115
utilities
BOOTP/DHCP 86
V
version
RMCT 109
W
watchdog time 177, 281
workstation software 51
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
293
Index
Notes:
294
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM535D-EN-P - November 2012
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support, you can find technical manuals, technical and application notes, sample
code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these
tools. You can also visit our Knowledgebase at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase for FAQs, technical
information, support chat and forums, software updates, and to sign up for product notification updates.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer
TechConnectSM support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada
1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada
Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html, or contact your local Rockwell
Automation representative.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
Riga
tel. +371 6738 1617
klinkmann@klinkmann.lv
Helsinki
tel. +358 9 540 4940
info@klinkmann.fi
St. Petersburg
tel. +7 812 327 3752
klinkmann@klinkmann.spb.ru
Moscow
tel. +7 495 641 1616
moscow@klinkmann.spb.ru
Yekaterinburg
tel. +7 343 287 19 19
yekaterinburg@klinkmann.spb.ru
Samara
tel. +7 846 273 95 85
samara@klinkmann.spb.ru
Кiev
tel. +38 044 495 33 40
klinkmann@klinkmann.kiev.ua
Vilnius
tel. +370 5 215 1646
post@klinkmann.lt
Tallinn
tel. +372 668 4500
klinkmann.est@klinkmann.ee
Мinsk
tel. +375 17 200 0876
minsk@klinkmann.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising